JP6894142B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a slave control means for executing a game effect based on a signal from a main control board.

In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, and the game effect is determined according to the result of the determination. It is common to do.

Some such gaming machines are provided with a main control board that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control board that controls the production of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-033816

In the conventional gaming machine, the case where the control state of the main control board and the control state of the sub control board deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly linking a main control means and an effect control means.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, based on the main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and the signals (commands) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) is a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45, 47). ) Can be stored, and the hold memory can be controlled to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), which is advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display). It is possible to control the display on the device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the plurality of variations By executing a related effect (for example, an action effect of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variable effect in the effect, the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) sequentially reduces the reserved memory one by one each time the variation effect is started. In a state where the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, the effect control unit 130 m). When a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals, which is 2 or more less than (for example, 4), is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) is received. ), The second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for reducing the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed. 1 The display means (special symbol hold display 63,64) is a case where either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. Even if there is, the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time the determination is completed, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is the first display means (special symbol hold indicator 63, 64), the second display means (first image) despite the increase / decrease in the reserved memory. A predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease.
When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notification, the effect related to the advance notification (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73, etc.) ) Is not executed from the continuation.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the demo waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table at the time of power failure. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the lamp change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot notice decision table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a central control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of winning. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. This is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the waiting state for customers. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 49. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect that the number of hold increases during the variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. This is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 58. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is changing display of a special symbol, and there is hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power-on time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) could not be received normally at power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the deformation example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 84. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 86. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is changing display of a special symbol, and there is hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of not being able to receive a power-on time command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) normally at power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows an example of the type of an effect symbol, the stop mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the production content determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes the revival suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes the promotion suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes the promotion suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart which shows the display of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes the stop suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes another stop suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example which includes the further stop suggestion effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the classification of the final predetermined mode of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the classification of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect content determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the classification of the temporary stop time of an effect symbol. It is a time chart which shows an example of the time about the temporary stop of an effect symbol. It is a time chart which shows an example of the time about the temporary stop of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect content determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table about the loss eye (chance eye) without reach. It is a figure which shows an example of the table about the pre-production. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect content determination table. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect mode, and the display mode of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the kind of suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the fluctuation effect pattern of a normal loss in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of reach loss / jackpot in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of the normal reach loss in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the revival effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of a jackpot in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode which continued with FIG. 134. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a promotion effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 136. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of SPSP reach loss in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the fluctuation effect pattern of a normal loss / reach loss in a probability change mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation display mode of FIG. 139. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the variation effect pattern of a jackpot in a probability variation mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation display mode of FIG. 141. It shows the display mode of the look-ahead notice executed in the fluctuation effect pattern of the normal / reach loss in the normal mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation display mode of FIG. 143. It is a figure which shows the continuation display mode of FIG. 144. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2-4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5-7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the production example in the specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10-12 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 12 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 13 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 14 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 2 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 3 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100, which will be described later. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11, and the game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the 17 is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode, and is button-driven. By the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the device 17b, it moves in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the effect position located above, and / or the button drive device 17b. It is possible to perform the effect operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button vibration motor, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is in the origin position. To.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game ball is full is provided in the lower plate 12, and the lower plate 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A launch volume 15b (see FIG. 2) composed of a 15a (see FIG. 2) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the launch handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the 4 to the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and an ascending member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At substantially the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced inside the vehicle is rolled and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and these general winning openings are provided. When the game balls that have won (winned) in 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win a ball), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, the game ball is from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 has a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning), and a second detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball in the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, a winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from a panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LED or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal map gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit lottery of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided that converts the (basic mode) into an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (FIG. 2), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. Then, when the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It will be paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second start port detection switch 47a and the large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39 and flows down are provided. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. The game balls that flow down the out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, as well as. A normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. Right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is affixed in the vicinity of the main information display device 59 (not shown). On the winning probability display sticker, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed. The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is a jackpot judgment random value and a jackpot that are acquired by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol display 60 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit judgment random value and a big hit by acquiring a big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Be told. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. To do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit game (special game) in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol (special game judgment) or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol (special game judgment). It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. The "big hit game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are opened in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

In the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit judgment random value is acquired, and the acquired hit judgment random value is compared with the hit judgment value to be "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed, the ordinary symbol display 62 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbols, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a stop display of the ordinary symbols indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (winning mode or losing mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of a normal symbol. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 is used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. It should be noted that the first hold storage is stored up to four, but may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing (variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second hold storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Public figure hold storage), and lights up or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold memory. It should be noted that although the maximum number of memory reserved for normal figures is four, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and "-" will be displayed. It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and the LEDs are in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 2 jackpot games, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and prompts the right-handed game ball to be launched toward the right-handed game area (so-called right-handed) in the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state. It is for displaying the hitting display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the mode shifts to, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As described above, since the state confirmation indicator 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is provided. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is possible to recognize which of the settings is set. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 is lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it can also be used as another indicator. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of any of the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right inside the game area 5a, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85. , A sub-information display device 80 including a sub-normal figure holding display 86 and a sub-right-handed display 87 for prompting the firing of a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) is provided. The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display device such as the status confirmation display device 68 described above, which indicates that the sub-information display device 80 is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation indicator 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol. It is for (notifying), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (variation display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up or loses in the case of a jackpot). In the case of, it goes out) is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 blink and stop during the fluctuation display of the special symbol so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed can be grasped. When it is displayed, it may be turned on or off.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold storages, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold storages, respectively, on the left and right. It is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved memories is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and the number of reserved memories is "2". At this time, the left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of reserved memories is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reserved memories is "4". ..

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of reserved storages for the normal figure is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of stored memory for the normal figure is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When the number of stored items is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of stored items on hold is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and an effect symbol executed during the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a.

The display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three rows of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area, and is displayed in each variable display area. By scrolling the effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (oscillating display) before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

The "temporary stop display" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not done) Say the aspect.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. is there. The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation that the jackpot (special game) will be executed (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") has been increased. There is.

Here, the "reach effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for a player in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side region and the right side region. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the center area. It is a reach effect that is executed in a state where a fluctuating reach state is formed.

The "SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a in the state where the reach state is formed is reduced and displayed in the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (high expectation of a big hit). ) It is a reach production in which movies (movies, animations, etc.) are played.

"SPSP reach production" is a reach that is executed after the normal reach production or SP reach production, and a movie (movie, animation, etc.) that has a higher production effect (high expectation of a big hit) than the normal reach production or SP reach production is played. It is a production.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation related to the reach production is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production <full rotation reach production (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and 2nd hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of 2nd hold icons corresponding to the current number of 2nd hold storages (U2). The icon display area 70C for displaying the (related) icon corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory is displayed thirdly, and the change display of the first special symbol is executed thirdly on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory is displayed secondly to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, and the third display unit 70D3 executes the variable display of the second special symbol third. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold memory on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. The vertical direction is between the standby position (origin position) located above and the effect position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor which is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving diagonally in the vertical direction, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their production positions partially overlap with each other, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 basically operate at the same time. By not doing so, they do not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the effect position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game. And the payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect accordingly, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal plate 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the game machine.

The main control device 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted on the surface, a transparent resin board case for accommodating the main control board 110 inside, and a board case for restricting the opening of the board case. It includes a sealing seal 104 and a transparent resin-based seal cover member 105 that is attached to a substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110 m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110 m are cleared or the game is advantageous (game). (Different advantages) Input a signal for updating the set value RWM clear switch 111a, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that can grasp the actual performance of the gaming machine 1, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base values described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP are arranged side by side. It is composed of things. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two seven-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of set values and performance information is configured by.

The board case includes a concave chamber-shaped lower case member in which the portion facing the back surface side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave chamber-shaped upper case member in which the portion facing the front surface side of the main control board 110 is opened. By closing the lower case member and the upper case member, a storage space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed so as not to overlap the information display 113 in the front-rear direction, and a management number on which the control number of the main control board 110 is printed are printed. The number stickers are attached side by side. Further, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operating member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. This insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a turns ON and the setting key cannot be pulled out from the keyhole, and is turned to the left. When the position is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

The control number sticker has an opener entry section for entering the name of the opener of the main control board 110 and an opening date entry section for entering the opening date of the main control board 110 on the surface of the colorless and transparent base seal. It is provided side by side.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is provided on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually confirming the mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opener entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry section at intervals, and the surface of the main control board 110 is located between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components mounted on the.

As the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit unit including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable to arrange them so that they do not overlap each other in the front-rear direction so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker and the control number sticker.

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. It may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 if the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 or may be provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal of may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110 or the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be mounted as a position that the player cannot operate. It may be provided on the 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and eventually. The performance information may be displayed on one of the indicators, and the set value may be displayed on the other indicator.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is provided with a main control unit 110 m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a main information display device 59, and a game information output. The terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game information output terminal boards that notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port. Information etc. is output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. The stored game data area and the second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A stack area for games to be evacuated and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the setting value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used by the information program as a work, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. The information stack areas for making the program are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. The relationship will be explained.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and performs a calculation process related to the payout of the game ball. The 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like. Is connected, and a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a controls the payout. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the game ball is launched in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls the effect (performed by the game machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130 m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display / sound control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the panel. It includes a lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls a lighting device 76, a panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Control is performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150). Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Or control the sound output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display / audio control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has a centralized RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 composed of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The control CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 143, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 144 as a work area, and receives the message from the effect control unit 130 m. The image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for this are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of brightness.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 with commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image and a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol. , Character images, and material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 147 is a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, a general-purpose image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for displaying image data and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, the controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices is controlled to perform a predetermined effect (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a panel lighting device 76, and a sub information display device 80 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit. Lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the 130m (sub CPU 130a). It controls and controls drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b and the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as states relating to the jackpot lottery of special symbols, and a "non-time saving game" as a state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "non-time-saving game state" (2) Low-probability time-saving game state that is "low-probability game state" and "time-saving game state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state, which is a high-probability game state and time-saving game state.

The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" is, for example, the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the advantage of the game is "1". , A game state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set as low as about 1/300 in a big hit lottery of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is as high as about 1/60. Says the set game status.

Specifically, there are four types of set values, "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state is about 1/300, which is high. The jackpot winning probability in the stochastic gaming state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state is about 1/295, and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state is about 1/295. The winning probability is about 1/59, and when the set value is "3", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/290, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/58. When the set value is "4", the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/285, and the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". Further, the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is a change in the average of the ordinary symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44. It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winner is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of being determined to be is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the big hit lottery, the small hit that is less advantageous to the advantager than the big hit is not won, but for example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/100. You may. In this case, it is preferable that the small hit probability is the same regardless of which of "1" to "4" the set value is.

In addition, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher). It may be.

Further, all the set values (1 to 4) may have the same probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state, and for example, two or three set values (2 or 3 setting values) may be set. In 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same.

Further, the set value of the present embodiment has four stages of 1 to 4, but the setting value is not limited to the four stages, and may be more or less than the four stages.

(Type of jackpot game)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "first jackpot game". There are "1st jackpot game" and "2nd jackpot game" as types of jackpot games that have "3 jackpot games" and can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. doing.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second jackpot game" is a round game executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" means that a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

It should be noted that the number of variable display times (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times and 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the big hit game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In the present embodiment, the types of jackpot games are three types, but the types are not limited to three, and may be less than or more than three types. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any big hit game (first big hit game to third big hit game), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds. The opening time may differ depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the Fuzu Gate 44, there are "first winning game" and "second winning game". If it is in a non-time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it is a "first winning game", and if it is in a time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it is a "second winning game".

The "first hit game" is to open the second starting port 47 for up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player has an advantage in the game without consuming the game ball as compared with the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup waiting processing of another board in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is moved to step S9 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is moved to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, every time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is set. When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and a process for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

The effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step S7 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process is moved to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process is started. Assuming that the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally, the process is moved to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is moved to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step S12. Transfer.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a performs an unrecoverable error process. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibit interrupt interrupts Set interrupt prohibition, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may be canceled even when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Change settings" is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please go. ”), Turn on the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. It is to output an unrecoverable error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “directing device”.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S13 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S14 as if the RWM clear operation is executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clearing process in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on on the image display devices 70 and 71. ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 to the RWM area is displayed. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that it has been initialized over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S17 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting confirmation specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, and the status confirmation display on the status confirmation indicator 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

The effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command will perform a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed, or the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may emit a predetermined amount of light while the setting is being confirmed. All lights are turned on in color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“confirming the set value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was turned off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The design "135") can be displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can be fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the sound output device 9 can be displayed. It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“power restoration” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a indicates other commands (a first special symbol hold number (U1), a special symbol storage designation command indicating a second special symbol hold number (U2), and a normal symbol hold number (G). (Ordinary symbol memory designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. It will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S25, the jackpot determination Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines in step S26 whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if no power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs processing for clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, sets the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. In step S31, Performs a process to prohibit RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so fraudulent activity can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent activities.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the panel lighting device 76, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Further, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. Then, the process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent, the current game state is sent. The game state specification command indicating the above may be transmitted.

Further, when the power is turned off or the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the non-recoverable error processing.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the setting change is performed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the setting change is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, the hit determination random number value, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step S130, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, an out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a controls the special symbol memory determination (big hit determination, etc.), the display control of the special symbol, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), the game state control, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. ..

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal diagram and the normal symbol, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies an error designation command for the magnetic abnormality or an error designation for the radio wave abnormality. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, the effect control board 130 performs control for performing the magnetic anomaly error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, 1st special symbol display 60, special symbol display data output to 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator Data creation processing is performed to create data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Special symbol hold display data, display output process to output signals such as normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, the number of payouts during the normal game, and the outs during the normal gaming state. A process is performed to count the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((number of normal payouts ÷ number of normal middle outs) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is set. The normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs the performance display data setting process (information program) in step S850. Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and the number of outs are counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine is used. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this large winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 50. If there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. It is updated and updated (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. Is determined. If the jackpot game is currently in progress, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 and update (C ← C + 1) to update the jackpot. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (winning) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (identify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6 to be described later is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is less than 4, the number of reserved figures is updated by adding "1" to the number of reserved figures (hit judgment random value, normal symbol determination random value, normal figure fluctuation pattern). (Random value for determination) is acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal figure judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process shifts to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value) are acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved first special symbols.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and inputs the acquired special figure determination information to the vacant storage units. Remember.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judge and determine the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time. The first start port detection switch input process of the above is terminated.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command receives the first start port prize. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined advance notice effect is produced over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designated command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is done using.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first pre-judgment process, and the first start port winning designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second special symbol hold storage area, the second hold storage, the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the second, respectively. 2 It may be read as a special symbol memory designation command, a second pre-judgment process, and a second start opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the determination process (step S310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the big hit game end processing (step S350). Transfer.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Is a change display of a special symbol, and a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not a customer waiting state in which a jackpot game is not executed (a waiting state in which the game is not progressing) is started is set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is.

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0" after the current special symbol memory determination process is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. The special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

When the number of 2nd special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random value values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after subtraction is the first. 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of the second special symbol hold.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. It is determined whether it is "missing" or "missing".

On the other hand, when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol hold storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) after subtraction is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved first special symbols.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. It is determined whether it is "missing" or "missing".

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, lost special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter to obtain the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern specification command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value and the random value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 performs variable display of the special symbol.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and is determined in advance. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol variation processing this time is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time reductions> 0, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update, when the number of time reductions = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when the number of high probability times> 0, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving number counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3 are set. Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing this time is completed.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing is performed. To finish.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a is for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), the large The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the predetermined number of round games (4 times or 16 times in the present embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 To the special figure special electric processing data = 4, prepare to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and end the jackpot game processing this time.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and also determines the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Performs jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number of times, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving number of times are performed. Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), and when the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) increases or decreases, it is stored in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of second special symbol reservations (U2), and when the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) increases or decreases, it is stored in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and is transmitted for the effect of the main RAM 110c when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot end. It can be said that.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when is started.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when is started.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and the main RAM 110c is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and the effect is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 130.

The "starting opening winning designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. At that time, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that the big hit game (special game) starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games start, and is set on the production control board. It is transmitted to 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the round game of the jackpot game is started, and is transmitted to the production control board 130. ..

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that the big hit game ends, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games end, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G1), and stores transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c when the value stored in the ordinary symbol reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the main RAM 110c It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. , Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that the hit game (auxiliary game) is started, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the hit game is started, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are completed, and when the hit game is completed, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state. Time) and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. When it is turned on, the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state, or the power recovery designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is reached in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not performed, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is reached. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of the error, and when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined by the above-mentioned magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process. When the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined in the above-mentioned large winning opening detection switch input processing or the above-mentioned second starting opening detection switch input processing, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

Further, even when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower plate 12 is full, or a payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, the payout RAM 121c is set in the effect transmission data storage area and is set in the effect control board. It is transmitted to 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or the payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130 m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

In step E10, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interruption, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs the input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change / confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is performed. The process for executing the change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, the processing for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A power restoration sound is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a customer waiting demo effect after a lapse of a predetermined time is performed. Do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. Do.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is being received, and if so, the command is stored in the sub RAM 130c. 1 Performs a process of updating the number of special symbol reservations, the number of second special symbol reservations, the number of ordinary symbol reservations, and the like.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start opening winning designation command or the fluctuation pattern designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the icon changes as a look-ahead effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous notice production, and lamp change production. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The "icon change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect in which the player is expected to execute the jackpot game by changing the hold icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect", and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes a player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "ramp change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special figure special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the special symbol confirmation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round designation command, the jackpot ending designation command, etc., with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, etc. Is received, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu Fuden effect processing. Specifically, whether or not the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is used to receive the normal figure designation command, the normal figure variation designation command, the normal symbol confirmation command, the hit opening designation command, the hit ending designation command, and the like. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and when the command is received, a process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not an error specification command or an error release specification command is being received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Is performed, and the process for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error release specification command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Customer waiting production processing of the production control unit)
A customer waiting effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state specification command has not been received, the process is moved to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state specification command has been received, in step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demo production. Select the demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time of. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13, one demo waiting time is determined from a plurality of demo waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is waiting. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not waiting, the customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demo effect is not executed. If the demo is waiting, the demo standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. ..

In step E300-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo standby timer = 0. If the demo standby timer is not 0, the customer waiting demo effect is not executed yet, and the customer waiting effect process is terminated. If the demo standby timer is 0, the customer waiting demo effect is produced in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect processing this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting demo effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect that appeals to the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect.

In FIG. 13, the demo waiting time determination table is associated with the game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time. Four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state. Is set.

The first feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo waiting time after the display is static, the demo waiting time after the variable display of the production symbol is finished (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is still displayed, and the production symbol after the customer waiting demo production is finished. There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed statically. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the current state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the variation display of the effect symbol ends (variates) rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the production symbol is statically displayed after (time has passed) is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the power is restored rather than the demo standby time after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed. Immediately after that, the demonstration waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the effect is displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo effect is completed is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively enhance the appealing power to the game to the player, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demo waiting time in a specific gaming state (low probability short game state, high probability time short game state) is more than each demo waiting time in the normal gaming state. Has a longer point. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Look-ahead production processing of the production control unit)
A look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, the effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes an icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform update processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs the continuous advance notice effect execution process for executing the continuous advance notice effect determined to be executed in the continuous advance notice effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs the lamp change effect execution process for executing the lamp change effect (turning on the winning opening lamp NR so that the light emitting mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and this time. The look-ahead production process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a start port winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received start opening winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it means that the game is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is used to win the winning of the second starting opening 47. If it is based on the above, it may be provided that it is in a specific gaming state (low probability short game state, high probability time short game state) or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a has all the pre-determination results of the advance hold (hold memory corresponding to the start opening winning designation command received earlier) equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the advance determination results of the advance hold are normally changed. Judge whether it is shortened fluctuation or normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-5, and if all are not below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the icon final display mode. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and is based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start opening winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. , One icon final display mode is determined from a plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is executed, the process is transferred to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Then, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the icon change effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed with a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed with a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / sound control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It will be displayed or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the prior determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-judgment result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect. The icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) when there is no icon change effect than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final display mode of the icon includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red character icon, and a rainbow character. The icon is set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is confirmed to be a jackpot. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the planned fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the ratio of special icons is higher than when the planned fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach where the scheduled fluctuation pattern is not reach. It is supposed to be selected.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, when a big hit occurs, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. ..

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario are associated with each other. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance fluctuation" is a fluctuation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure judgment information stored before the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. , "The fluctuation" is a fluctuation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (holding icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and an icon display mode that changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the variation (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide the scenario to be made. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is higher than that during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of the production control unit)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E520-2, and determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in step E520-3. .. If the icon change scenario is not memorized, the process is moved to step E520-10 assuming that the power recovery has occurred in which the change scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c, and the icon change scenario is memorized. Moves the process to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a hold icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variation effect. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-5, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 19) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 19, among the plurality of hold icon change patterns, based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command according to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 corresponds to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) may change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) may be output.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-9, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a is used for power failure to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) is selected. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 corresponds to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) may change, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) may be output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, when the power supply is restored during the execution of the icon change effect, the icon change effect is executed again in the variation effect started after the power restoration. There are now. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even when the icon change effect is executed again in the variation effect started after the power is restored, the icon change effect is produced based on the current variation pattern. By newly determining the mode, it is not executed from the continuation of the change scenario before power restoration (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

If the power supply is restored during the execution of the icon change effect, the hold memory (special figure determination information) prior to the execution trigger of the icon change effect in the variation effect started after the power restoration is performed (the hold memory (special figure determination information)). The icon change effect may not be executed in the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information), and the icon change effect may be executed by the variation effect corresponding to the hold memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the hold icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern for the hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect (at the start of fluctuation) when the hold icon is shifted and displayed according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears is performed to display the icon. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol indicating that the icon display mode changes as a result of the variation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the action effect that acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. Is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the symbol action change pattern 01 is set.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode that is two levels higher.

The timing for generating the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 20 is a diagram that changes the display mode of the icon by one step. It is a table referred to in the case, and FIG. 21 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the fluctuation with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1 UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo variation is performed.

"Pseudo-continuous production" is a variable display of the production symbol multiple times for a jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). In order to make it appear as if was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). This is a special aspect of the effect symbol variation display in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(The icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the selected icon. The final display mode of the icon and the selected icon change pattern are associated with each other, and for reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern, the change effect occurrence timing of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.

(Relationship between hold icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23A is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a red character icon. The predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of the change, and the normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command are the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of, is high, the player can be made to pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

In addition, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command occurs more frequently than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, the change effect that changes to the blue character icon occurs, so that the variation effect is early. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 23B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 23C is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated as the icon (when changed to), When the second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (change), and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (when it changes to). When the third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change) and the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, or when a CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and only when the icon changes to any mode, the notification sound is output. It may be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Continuous notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
The continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a start port winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect, the process is transferred to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect, the process is transferred to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous advance notice effect is not executed. ..

The "executable period of the continuous advance notice effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous advance notice effect is not being executed, or the continuous advance notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received start opening winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it means that the game is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is used to win the winning of the second starting opening 47. If it is based on the above, it may be provided that it is in a specific gaming state (low probability short game state, high probability time short game state) or the like.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a advance notice scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect. The details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This notice scenario shows the transition of the notice effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the continuous advance notice effect determination process this time. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the type of the start opening prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario can be determined. Based on this, one notice scenario is determined from a plurality of notice scenarios (including non-notice scenarios). The details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notification scenario in which the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous advance notice effect determination process. To do.

(Notice scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a notice scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a notice scenario for the continuous notice effect.

In the notice scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario Are associated with each other, and as a reference, the advance variation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the change are described.

In the notice scenario, an effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the variation effect. A non-notice scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the advance notice effect is not executed, and an effect image around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the advance variation. Is not displayed, but the effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the fluctuation (for example, scenario 01), the effect is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the pre-variation, and at the start of the fluctuation. A scenario in which an image is displayed (for example, scenario 02, etc.) is set.

(Continuous notice production execution processing of the production control unit)
A continuous advance notice effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect execution process of this time is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and determines whether or not the advance notice scenario is stored in step E540-3. .. If the transfer notice scenario is memorized, the process is moved to step E540-4, and if the notice scenario is not memorized, the step is assumed that the power recovery has occurred in which the notice scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c. Process E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous advance notice pattern (effect mode) according to the notice scenario, and in step E540-5, sets a continuous notice effect command according to the determined continuous notice pattern in the transmission buffer. .. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the continuous advance notice effect is executed according to the continuous advance notice pattern, and the effect symbol 70a is executed at the start of the variable effect. An effect image is displayed around the, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines an alternative advance notice pattern determination table for determining whether or not to execute the alternative advance notice effect as compensation for the continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (FIG. 27) is selected to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, one alternative from a plurality of alternative advance notice patterns is made based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative advance notice pattern with reference to the selected alternative advance notice pattern determination table. Determine the notice pattern. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative notice effect" is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power cutoff), and is an effect for a plurality of mini characters having different jackpot expectations on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by displaying either of them.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E540-7 whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern executes the substitute notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is not executed, the continuous notice effect execution process is terminated as if the alternative notice effect is not executed, and if the alternative notice effect is executed, the alternative notice pattern is applied. The alternative advance notice effect command is set in the transmission buffer, and the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the alternative advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the alternative advance notice effect is executed according to the alternative advance notice pattern, and the mini character is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is restarted in the variable effect started after the power is restored. Instead, an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power off), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative advance notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative advance notice pattern, and the alternative advance notice pattern to be selected. The effect mode in the pattern is described.

The alternative notice pattern includes pattern 00 in which the substitute notice effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and mini character C is displayed on the image display device. Pattern 03 is set, and pattern 04 in which the mini character D is displayed on the image display device is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit for a mini character is higher in the order of mini character A <mini character B <mini character C <mini character D, and mini character D is a mini character that is confirmed to be a big hit.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the change pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation is executed as an alternative notice effect rather than the fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. The point is that the pattern can be easily determined. By doing so, if there is a high possibility that the continuous advance notice effect was executed before the power restoration occurred, the alternative advance notice effect will be executed, and the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect will be felt. It can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect. It is easier to determine the alternative notice pattern in which the alternative notice effect is executed than in the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect prior to the hold is executed. By doing so, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, in the variable effect executed after the power is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect (line notice effect, step-up notice effect) described later, so that the jackpot notice effect is executed. By making the probability higher than usual, the alternative advance notice effect may not be executed.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable that the jackpot notice effect is easier to be executed than when the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not been set is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub RAM 130c. The process is moved to step E550-6 assuming that the power restoration that has been cleared has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process is moved to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. Will be done.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp change effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp change effect is produced. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process is moved to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and performs the lamp change effect execution process this time. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR is changed in response to the icon change in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform production. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the synergistic effect with the icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to do or perform an alternative notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power supply is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variation effect started after the power supply is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the prior fluctuation to the change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do so.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process determines the variation effect pattern determination process (variation effect pattern determination command based on the variation pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process. It is executed after the process to be performed).

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E650-1, and makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed in step E650-2. The jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the above is selected, and the advance notice pattern is determined. Specifically, referring to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of notice patterns (non-notice patterns) are based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern. (Including), one notice pattern is determined. The details of the jackpot notice decision table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a warning pattern for executing the dialogue warning effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the dialogue notice effect, the process is moved to step E650-4, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the line notice effect, the process is moved to step E650-6.

The "speech notice effect" is a voice output device in which a dialogue image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed on the image display device in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, the dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed when the jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates for, for example, only one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a serif pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a serif pattern in the serif notice effect, and determines the serif pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the dialogue advance notice effect command corresponding to the dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue pattern is executed, and the dialogue image is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed, or the sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the sound output device 9.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern is such that the step-up notice effect is executed. If it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is moved to step E650-7, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

"Step-up notice effect" is a jackpot advance notice effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until any of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is a kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of the jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, one of a plurality of step-up patterns is selected based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern with reference to the step-up pattern determination table. Determine the step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the step-up advance notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up pattern is executed, and the first image display device 70 A step image is displayed on the screen, or a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the voice output device 9.

(Big hit notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a jackpot notice effect determination process referred to when determining a notice pattern for the jackpot notice effect.

The jackpot notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The expectation of winning a big hit is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142, and the control CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the centralized ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the centralized RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the centralized CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupts, and in step T4, determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144. If it is determined and not received, the process is moved to step T7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command in step T5. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect.

In step T6, the general CPU 142 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is moved to step T4 and the frame switching flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the control CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit. Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the control CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and draws the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer into the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the general CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the general CPU 142 performs a sound output command process for instructing the voice control unit 148 to output a sound based on the sound list output. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs a sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In step T20, the control CPU 142 performs a command reception process for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m in the reception buffer of the control RAM 144 is performed, and the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the V-blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and the V-blank interrupt processing ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the general CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating (for example, adding “1”) a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process for instructing the VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will switch alternately to and.

In step T32, the general CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 gives the second generation notification sound. Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Normally, a variable effect is executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 45, a start port prize designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130 m, and the icon change effect determination process is executed, as a change scenario. It is assumed that "scenario 02" (display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36B, the first holding icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 show timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variation effect (the timing at which the variation effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronically), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 39A, when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is started. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. In addition, the CD icon is changed to the blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
40 and 41 show timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process, and various timings when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen d (character display), but the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound. Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device normally displays the variable effect display screen e (character display), but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of an image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the image display device is displayed on the normal variable effect display screen j (red character). (Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of production of character action change pattern 01)
42 and 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The normal fluctuation effect to be made is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), after the character C1 is displayed, the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation as shown in FIG. 42 (c) to move the heart H to the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of flying towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the sound output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the change symbol or the like, and the voice output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 notifies the third occurrence. Sound output is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol image, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 46 and 47 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). An effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area in the center (stop display). Upon hitting, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3 to suggest that it is a big hit, and the variable display effect symbol 70a is a combination indicating that it is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (starting port winning designation command or variation pattern designation command). Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a determination method. .. For example, it may be decided whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) can be changed. When it becomes, it may be decided each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the icons (corresponding icon, hold icon) are 4 as a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. Although it was a type, it is not limited to four types, and may be many or few.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a jackpot than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern specification command) It is desirable not to change to a special icon in the change effect) that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which easily change to a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big hit, Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in (), it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed but not changed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) is provided. The execution rate is higher than that of the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02 and the character action change. It is desirable that only the pattern 01 and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) are changed normally because the timing is only once during the change effect. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, since the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variation effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting port winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be two frames after the number of frames received (command or variable pattern specification command), but it is not limited to two frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the specified command, the number is even one frame later. It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern specification command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example, special. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol memory designation command or the effect symbol specification command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. Although the change effect has been executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is the same as the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound. At the same time (synchronously), the lamps of the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the character action change pattern 01 executed during the fluctuation are set. By restricting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command), the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but the display is not limited to such a change, and the hold icon and the icon itself are displayed. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around the hold icon or the icon (near). A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed on the screen, or a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren") suggesting an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the hold icon or the icon. May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, it is determined regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if it is lost and changes to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than when the jackpot is won and changes to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but it is decided by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the current number of holds is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is more when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select "normal change pattern 01".
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than if the jackpot is won and the icon changes to the red character icon. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of holds is "1". "3" and "4" have a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "2" and "2", so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, a modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), a special pattern is variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Further, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current first reserved number display area 70E are displayed at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70. 2 It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area. The first hold icon displayed on the 70B and the second hold icon displayed on the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed on the icon display area 70C is the execution information. Corresponds to.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 38 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49 (a) to (f) and 50 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 48 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animation increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is performed. Output starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49B, in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 in a normal size. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are started. To.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH is set, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special symbols held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, one frame that minimizes the increase display by non-animation of the hold numbers and hold icons. Since it ends in a minute period (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so that it will not be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is after the timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update) (frame). Since it continues until the timing (update), it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations is reduced (changed from "1" to "0"), the reduction display of the hold number by non-animation and the change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update), the special symbol is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has decreased due to the reserved number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the number of special symbols held increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started at a timing shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 52. FIG. 51 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 51 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52B, in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases, the non-animated increase display of the hold number and the increase display by the animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the special symbol hold number has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the interest of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol hold changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has increased due to the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special symbol hold increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the hold number and the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special symbol is held. It is possible to effectively produce the increase in the number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increase display of the hold icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be made the same length as the period related to the display of the change of the hold icon to the icon, instead of being shorter.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 54. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 53 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) based on the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the number of the first hold is reduced by non-animation, the change of the first hold icon is displayed by animation to the icon, and the animation of the first hold icon is displayed. The reduction display by is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the change display and decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, when the increase display of the first hold icon or the icon is generated. The output of the generation notification sound, which is the notification sound of, will be on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first hold icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2 to continue the enlarged display. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the (frame update) timing, the player indicates that the number of special symbol hold has increased even while the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols held increases during the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for ( (Limited), and when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special symbol hold numbers It is possible to prevent the icon from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed from usual). The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) shortly before the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols reserved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for in the same manner as during the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 55 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect by the SP reach fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "7" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start reduced display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56B, in the first image display device 70, in the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) is left with the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing or when the icon is generated The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a, which has been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol pending, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special symbol hold increases increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it has been done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable to execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is illustrated as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (f) and 59 (g) to (i) are shown in FIG. 57 (a). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58A, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B has been erased, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed, and at the upper right of the screen, a game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, a result display indicating the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, the "special time end" indicating the end of the specific gaming state, and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of jackpot games executed in the game "Big hit x 1" is displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is performed with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second hold number is reduced by non-animation, the second hold icon is changed by animation to the icon, and the second hold icon is reduced by animation. The display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the above start moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, on the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 that have moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is waited (restricted), while the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of 1st special symbol hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the 1st hold icon is displayed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reserved has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special symbol is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the production during the variable production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special symbol hold increases by a plurality during the specific game state, while the hold number increase display is executed, the hold icon increase display is waited (restricted). It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special symbol hold increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). It is also possible to set (display) only the first hold icon display area 70B without displaying).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71 (in this embodiment). It may be set (displayed) or set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbol reservations depending on the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150, and this processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing executed every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the lamp / drive control unit 150. Will be executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Perform processing such as setting to "2". The details of the origin return processing will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , Finish the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of the various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed. The operation process is not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. By doing so, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Lamp / drive control unit home return processing)
The origin return process of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is “0”. To do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-2. 1 Set to the movable member 73, and move the process to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9. , Step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 can be driven, and the board accessory processing number becomes "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the processing is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is transferred to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. Ends the origin return processing of.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-22. Set "2" and finish the home return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable). The member 73 → the second movable member 74) returns to the origin position. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separating, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying a load to each other so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress various inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. It is possible to execute the return operation to the same time (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are returning and not performing the effect even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. When both of the return operations to are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. By doing so, the return operation of the various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of the various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and the initial operation of the various accessories are separately confirmed. It becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position. The operation of returning to may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. It becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp / drive control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board accessory. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets the lamp RAM 150c in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, one initial operation pattern is selected from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine the operation pattern.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the steps, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the process number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the process number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. It can be executed at the same time (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to prevent the production operation of the various accessories from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 constituting the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the effect button 17 completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which is generated is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. If this happens, the initial operation processing will end. By doing so, it is unclear whether one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, but the other is performing the effect operation or the effect operation. Will not occur.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting for a customer, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 is in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin. The second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin without the first movable member 73 operating. During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

The "initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
The "initial operation pattern 05" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the first movable member 73 is determined when there is a return abnormality and the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light in blue, and as a result, it is the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04.
The "initial operation pattern 08" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
The "initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is the first movable due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is the second movable due to the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the board accessory The point that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is the same. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and / or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It will be possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second) is when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. A point is that the light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

It should be noted that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is the same, but the initial light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. On the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different, while that of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. It can be mentioned that the mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by power restoration that restores to the customer waiting state, the initial operation by power restoration that restores during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It will be possible.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the first movable member LED is turned off. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as at the time of power restoration for restoring the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, and the second is When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member When the 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on and the initial operation pattern to be selected. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of initial operation are described. ing.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return → intermittent vibration, and the effect button LED is activated during that period. Lights (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return. During that period, the effect button lights up (lights up) in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or the third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is received. The effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the effect button LED turns off during that period.

The continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 are executed by operating the effect button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable effect. The time that the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect (1 second vibration if it is the valid period for the big hit notice that expects to be a big hit, 5 if it is the valid period for the decision effect that notifies whether it is a big hit or not. The time is different from the second vibration).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the frame accessory The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (effect button 17) is different. By doing so, it is easy to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Is possible.

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to let you. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in the initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of power-on and at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the board accessory is a board accessory when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. The light emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes.

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is produced during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that it is the vibration in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 17 is overlaid on the initial operation of the effect button 17 on which the detection is performed. By doing so, the operation check of the effect button 17 and the operation check of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation check can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T9, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial stage The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED finish the initial light emission and turn on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) is set. After that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on control command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial stage The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 shows "1", and the sound output device 9 gives a winning sound "1". "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the LED is lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 shows "1", and the sound output device 9 gives a winning sound "1". "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lights).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and has the hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". , The audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage specification command (first hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the first hold number is displayed. The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the sub second hold indicator 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T7, the first operation 2 When the initial operation of the movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary) on the image display device. The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the displayed state is displayed, and the stop sound “Don ♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "2". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

When the state after the power is restored is the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and there is no hold storage, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the variation effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the power line connector is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses thereafter, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which the effect can be executed.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses thereafter, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the second standby screen.

Further, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power is turned on is output. You may do so. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or may be a different alarm.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally, the effect control is performed from the first case, the main control board 110, in which the power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but the power is not supplied to the main control board 110. The second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and the like can be mentioned. Case 3 will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol memory designation command (first hold number and the first hold number) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110. When the second hold number = 0) is received, the initial screen is maintained in the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T3, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. Although it is maintained, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

When a variation start command (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the image display device receives the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. , After the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the movement to the icon) Change, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Is displayed, the standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is issued regardless of whether the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). When the demo waiting time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the control state of the game is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is supplied with a power source instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

It should be noted that the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, and the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). The return operation and the initial operation of 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 66, 67, or 68. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is replaced with the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen when the power is restored. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol of the above, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 79 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation display is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the hold number "1" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal map hold display 86) maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is movable. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the effect confirmation display is performed by losing the variation effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed). Is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the confirmation display of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the confirmation screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a big hit display mode which shows that it is a big hit.

When the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Depending on the mode, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and right-handed is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The suggested right-handed display image MG is displayed, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is stopped and displayed (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started to start the origin return process and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is a big hit including the characters "Please restart the game (big hit)". The intermediate return screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86) maintain the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is movable. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , The normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that the normal ending effect screen is not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Will be displayed.

Further, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when a round designation command is received while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, the special jackpot effect screen until the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command. Or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 77 to 80, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold indicator (sub first hold display). It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display executes hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration production, and the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, with respect to the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), the power supply stopped during the fluctuation production is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display of the special symbol is displayed). Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). From the time when the sub-variation display is displayed (before the fluctuation display is performed on the sub-variation display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode indicates the number of holds. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82) performs fluctuation display (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) indicates the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various accessories is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the return operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the return operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is to be continued. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory that has a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) from the subsequent timing (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed). However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during restoration). From the middle), the initial operation of various accessories is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power restoration without the above, when the restoring screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83). , Sub-second hold indicator 84) is designed to perform the initial operation after the display mode indicates the number of holds. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board after letting the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84). ) Is displayed to indicate the number of pending items, and then the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory after letting the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device, that is, the timing after the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed) is the initial stage of various accessories. It is designed to operate. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored simply by displaying the initial screen. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on has occurred.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the effect is produced. When the control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command and receives the special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, the winning sound is output. It is designed to do. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the effect is produced. When a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is performed without executing the return operation or the initial operation of various accessories. Is supposed to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation or the initial operation during the execution of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and the variation effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are already completed, the main control board 110 When the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the power supply is stopped, the recovery operation of various accessories and the initial operation ( (Including initial emission) is to be executed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even during the control state, if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is finished. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed responds to the command. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted even in the control state in which the effect can be executed. Is designed to output the initialization notification sound again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is emitted from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of various accessories. May just output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

It should be noted that the main control board is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. ing. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and the variation effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 executes an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where When the first standby screen is displayed without being displayed and the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Modification example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 81 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A case where the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the stop is described will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. Is lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Means that the standby screen in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display The device 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses (after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. To do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map fluctuation display 85, sub The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 provides an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed or the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed or the jackpot is being hit. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Example shown in FIG. 77 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). Is basically the same.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, while the effect control board 130 is in the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states capable of executing the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped to supply the backup power source. A case where the main power supply is restarted while the supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses (after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map fluctuation display 85, sub The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen by "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed or the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed or the jackpot is being hit. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device is displayed at the timing of T3. Figures 78 to 80 show, except for the customer waiting demo production screen, the fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and the jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the above example.

In addition, in FIGS. 81 to 82, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed from the initial screen. , And the effect button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (the main control board 110 has an abnormality).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of various accessories from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the various accessories are not started from the timing of switching to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen is displayed from the standby screen when the power ON command (power-on specification command, power recovery specification command) is received. You may switch to the screen. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen, or the initial screen is changed to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing of switching from the hidden state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modified example when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and the initial of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. The initial operation process ends without the operation being executed.

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode). , The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power is restored, if the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member having the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed even for a movable member that does not exist. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (particularly, the movable members on which the return abnormality has not occurred) from stopping during the execution of the game (variable effect, jackpot game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED Flashes red to notify the recovery error. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks in red.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are movable. The initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that does not collide with the member 74. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to grasp the abnormality of the effect button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided on the effect button 17 returns. The initial light emission is performed without blinking red to notify the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has no return abnormality.

When the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed without executing the initial operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17, the initial operation process may be completed for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 without executing the initial operation. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be made to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Example of production when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
84 and 85 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84A, when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728". It is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display are started. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted to the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon to start the icon change effect, and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and blinks red. The lamp change effect is started by changing to the changed state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icon.

After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C on which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect on the winning opening lamp NR remains continuous.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 84 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Maintain the state.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the characters "Please restart the game" are displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 85 (h). The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to the jackpot effect symbol that is more valuable to the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 85 (i), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). The effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) are displayed without performing (variation). The variation effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but is rectangular. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 85 (k), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). The jackpot production symbol 70a (reach state before power off) of "777" suggesting the type of the jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing the fluctuation / swing display) is "3". ↓ 3 ”is a combination of production symbols that is different from the reach combination by the production symbol), and the stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is restarted with the winning opening lamp NR. The fluctuation production ends without doing anything.

In addition to the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, other variable effects (variable effect in which normal variation is executed, variable effect in which shortened variation is executed, variable effect in which normal reach effect is executed, SP reach effect) When the power supply stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation / swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed, and the "variation effect" is executed. 753 ”lost effect symbol 70a, or the jackpot effect symbol that is the same combination of effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that formed the reach state before the power was turned off, or a combination of different effect symbols is stopped display (still display). Will be done.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) with a number having the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (l), the image display device is provided with information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is the first jackpot game). The including opening effect is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then displayed as a stop is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol confirmation command (when the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the transition to the customer waiting state is performed after that, the customer waiting state is specified after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When a command) is received, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (stationary display) without temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a (sway fluctuation / swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss fluctuation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. When this is done, the combination of the effect symbols, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is stopped and displayed (still display) instead of the normal loss effect symbol. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as determining the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (still displayed) by lottery, the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and the power supply is reduced. It becomes possible to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed at the time of stopping has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In that case, the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display). By doing so, it is possible to understand that the power restoration is such that the control state of the game is restored, and that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variation effect. Become.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the combination of the jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot production symbols that is different from the reach combination of the production symbols that were used. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbol that was scheduled to be stopped before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the variable effect executed at the time when the power supply is stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. By doing so, no useless effect is performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), so that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable effect. Can be immediately grasped by the player.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, there are cases where the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and cases where the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the restart of power supply is the same as in the case where the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether the loss fluctuation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed, and the display after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (still display) is performed with a number having the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect symbol 70a) is started, the icon display area 70C displays a quadrangular area image, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped while the hold icon is displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step is performed. By displaying a square area image in the hold icon display area until the variable effect of is started, the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed. It is secured and the hold icon is displayed. By doing so, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the pending fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with a high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) If the power supply stopped during the memory of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lights up in white) does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It will be possible.

After the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but as in the case of loss, when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed) may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed are displayed, but the jackpot effect symbol 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. May be started for the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which are the initial symbols at the time of power restoration, are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot is displayed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the effect symbol 70a in the reach state in the variable effect (expecting that the jackpot game is executed), the specific effect is specified. After the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if there is a loss, the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol 70a may be stopped and displayed (still displayed).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that there are "444", "666", and "888", and the combinations of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game are "111", "555", and "999".

Then, when the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1 ↓ 1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game executed after that is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of jackpot production symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination by the production symbols that formed the reach state). It is advisable to stop and display.

Further, the special symbol TZ does not stop and display (still display) with a number that is the same combination as the effect symbol 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, but the combination is different from the effect symbol 70a. It may be set to stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), while the power supply is turned on. If the specific game state (low-accuracy time-short game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) and the customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a is not stopped and displayed (still display). The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still display).

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during continuous notice effect, hold icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
86 and 87 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86A, the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect that becomes the advance variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first hold icon (shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2) ( By changing the display mode of the icon final display mode (red character icon) to the blue character icon, the hold icon change effect is started, and the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state accordingly. The lamp change effect is started at.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), after the effect symbol 70a showing the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes the advance variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 86 (g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 86 (h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is a lamp. Keep the lights off without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the characters "Please restart the game" are displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 87 (i). The returning screen including the above is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 87 (j), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway variation). Instead, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change effect is changed in advance without restarting. Is finished.

At this time, a CD icon that is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, when the square area image is displayed, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 87 (k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 displays the variable display. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if the lottery related to the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result, so that the icon is displayed. The change production is started. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the winning opening lamp NR remains off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if the lottery for the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB is moved so as to be framed out. The notice production is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (l), the dialogue issued by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice “Chance has arrived!” Corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9. Is displayed to execute the dialogue notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped displayed) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the central variable display area is displayed. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 87 (n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second The hold icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 87 (o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 87 (p), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333" suggesting the type of the jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

Further, if the special symbol confirmation command cannot be received during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a), the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation) does not stop and display. The temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) will be continued.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration is stored. In the variable effect corresponding to the determination information, it is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without restarting the continuous advance notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the suspension of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, the icon is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply stopped while the icon is displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variation effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, even when the icon change effect is executed again during the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. It is no longer executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the memory of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (lights off or lights up in white) that does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It will be possible.

(Specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
88 (a) and 88 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is integrated into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. And.

First, FIG. 88 (a) will be described.
FIG. 88A is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is not connected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the characters "connection error detection" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 displays an alarm and "connection error". A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice of is output.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, it is detected that the connection error is canceled by the main control board 110. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88 (b) will be described.
FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are not connected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device has the characters "magnetic error detection" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detection" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the "connection error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the characters "detection" is displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound composed of an alarm and a sound "magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board It is detected by 110 that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error are canceled, but various error notifications are continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

When the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the main control board 110 does not detect the occurrence of a connection error and causes an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, a specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) connected to the main control board 110. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (half-insertion of the connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and it is possible to take a prompt response.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is not provided. Even when the connection state is restored to the connection state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error is continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the error notification is not performed even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , Various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88) from the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (when the display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen starts). Radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first start port detection switch 45a is used. The connection error notification may be canceled when the connection state is changed from the unconnected state. In this way, the game can be continued as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

In addition, the radio error notification sound related to a radio error having a lower priority (importance) than the magnetic error and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error having a lower priority (importance) than the radio error are referred to as magnetic errors. If they occur at the same time, they are not output, but the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. May not be output.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150.
In addition, here, the same processing as the accessory initial processing of the first embodiment is designated by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and different processing will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the start of power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process shifts to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

When the lamp CPU 150a receives the power ON command that determines in step R102A whether or not the power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. Moves the process to step R102B, and if the power ON time command has not been received, moves the process to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds after the previous power-on and the initial operation should have been completed) has elapsed, the process is transferred to step R103, and the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process is transferred to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started. It has become. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to the operation.

Further, according to a modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, a power ON command (power on designation) occurs after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. When a command (command, power restoration designation command) is received, the restoration operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. As a result, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the command when the power was turned on was transmitted later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred. It becomes possible to grasp that.

When a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation of various accessories and the recovery operation of various accessories are performed regardless of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. , The initial operation may be performed. In this way, it is not necessary to be aware of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and it is possible to simplify the process when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, the sub 1st hold indicator 83, the sub 2nd hold indicator 84, and the sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .. In addition, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights alternately in red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights red and white alternately. , The light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. finish.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. To do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on specification command is output and controlled. Upon reception by the board 130, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. .. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, the sub 1st hold indicator 83, the sub 2nd hold indicator 84, and the sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the home return processing is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .. At this time, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the effect is produced. The light emitting mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.
Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. ..

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. When finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started by the sub first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and has the hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, the sub 1st hold indicator 83, the sub 2nd hold indicator 84, and the sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. The light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage specification command (first hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the first hold number is displayed. The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub second hold indicator 84 and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode showing "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary) on the image display device. The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the displayed state is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "2". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the power line connector is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, when the power supply is started without supplying power to the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, the sub 1st hold indicator 83, the sub 2nd hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 is in a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the T4 When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and the second movable member ends at the timing of T6. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command.

When the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected at the timing of T7, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. When the light is turned on (lit in white) and the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is broken, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

Since the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, the description here will be omitted, and the timings after T7 will be described.

When the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected at the timing of T7, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the effect is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. It lights up (lights up in white).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Further, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power is turned on (makes it possible to grasp) is emitted for a predetermined period. The output may be made over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 99 to 100, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the command communication line. There is a case where the connector of is in the non-connected state (including the half-inserted state).

Since the timings from T1 to T5 are the same as the timings from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, the description here will be omitted, and the timings after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, the special symbol memory designation command (first hold number and second hold number) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110. When the number of holds = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off. It becomes.

When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

When a variation start command (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device receives the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. , After the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variation effect (effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the movement to the icon) Change, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation is completed are already in the customer waiting state, and the image display device has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub-th). 1 Fluctuation display 81, Sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, Sub 1st hold indicator 83, Sub 2nd hold indicator 84, Sub-Public map fluctuation indicator 85, Sub-Public map hold indicator 86) maintain.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as the initial light emission, and the image display device is powered by a power source. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the sound output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound is silenced.

It should be noted that the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, and the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). The return operation and the initial operation of 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

Further, when there is an abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking in red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is emitted as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 91, 92, or 93. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 103 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the image display device is in a waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the displayed contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display). The second standby screen of the state is displayed.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as the power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation indicator 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-general map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. When it is finished, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and waiting for customers. It lights up (lights up in white).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed in the same manner as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 104 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation display is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the hold number "1" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub). The second variation indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-general figure variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal map hold indicator 86) maintain the displayed contents.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the effect confirmation display is performed by losing the variation effect. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the audio output device 9 is displayed. A stop sound is output from. Further, "1" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the confirmation display of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

When the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories and the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. The fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display and the sub second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) Is in a stopped display (static display) state. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply) is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started to start the origin return process and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays the returning screen for the jackpot, which includes the characters "Please resume the game (during the jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. Further, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-general). The figure hold display 86) maintains the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You may do so.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , The normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that the normal ending effect screen is not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Will be displayed.

Further, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when a round designation command is received while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, the special jackpot effect screen until the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command. Or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories and the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 102 to 105, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold indicator (sub first hold display). It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display executes hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration production, and the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display of the special symbol is displayed). Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). From the time when the sub-variation display is displayed (before the fluctuation display is performed on the sub-variation display and when the special symbol memory designation command is received), the display mode indicates the number of pending numbers. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82) performs fluctuation display (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) indicates the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various accessories is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the return operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the return operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has a return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is to be continued. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory that has a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power restoration without the above, the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) are displayed in a display mode indicating the number of holds (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. The initial operation is performed before. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , The sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) performs the initial operation before the display mode indicates the number of holds (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It has become like. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the frame accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, and the initial operation of various accessories are performed. In addition, the initial light emission is executed and the display of the initial screen is continued. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on has occurred.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the display of the initial screen is continued because the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received. , When the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command and receives a special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a winning sound is received. Is to be output. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variable effect is executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and the variation effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even during the control state in which the effect can be executed, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command from the main control board 110 are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even during the control state, if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is finished. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission of various accessories. You may just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state for customers after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

It should be noted that the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and during the variable effect or the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and the variation effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to a command, such as during the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 executes an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where When the first standby screen is displayed without being displayed and the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated from each other, the disagreement occurs. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

It should be noted that the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect, but from the main control board 110 after activation. The state of waiting for a command (for example, displaying the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but it may be composed of the numbers (identification characters) + the character (decorative part). In this case, the characters may be different for each number, such as "1" and character A, and "2" and character B. In addition, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number + character in the normal game state, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number only or a character smaller than the number + normal game state in the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). It may be displayed with.

Further, three types of effect modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes F to G may be provided in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode A is always set. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode D is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes F to G in the low accuracy short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode F is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state, the effect symbol 70a is changed to only a number, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is completed, and the effect symbol 70a is provisionally set. When the stop display (swing display) is displayed, the effect symbol 70a may be returned to the number + character.

In this case, during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect symbol 70a is changed to only numbers, the power supply is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted to restore the control state of the game. When this is done, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

Further, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or the SPSP reach in the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state), that is, when the effect symbol 70a is only a number, and then the power supply is supplied. When the control state of the game is restored by restarting, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers will be statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Some of such gaming machines display a reserved image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned gaming machines in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) that controls the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? A determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not the determination is made, and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination are provided, and the slave control means is a reserved image corresponding to the reserved right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays (hold icon) on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect (voice output device 9) on the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing an icon generation (change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means displays an image to be displayed on the display means at a predetermined frame update timing. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to be updated and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. The first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the command (starting port winning designation command) indicating that the right is generated transmitted from the main control means, and the main control means. The second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern specification command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from The effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and the frame update timing is different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. Is set to end the notification effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) that controls the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? Based on the determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and the result of the determination, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. The slave control means includes an image display means (display / display) that displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right on the display means (first image display device 70). The voice control unit 140), the effect execution means (display / voice control unit 140) that causes the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the progress of the game. The image display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and indicates the possibility of performing the special game from the reserved image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing to a hold image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variation display of the symbol transmitted from the main control means is started. ) Is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the first change effect (normal change pattern 01), and a predetermined command after receiving the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The first change effect is started by the effect execution means, including the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing of. The notification effect is started at the frame update timing, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) that controls the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? Based on the determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and the result of the determination, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable control means (main CPU 110a) is provided, and the slave control means has a pre-judgment pending image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right and after the determination is made for the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the post-determination pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right of the image on the display means (first image display device 70), and a directing means (display / voice control unit 140) in the progress of the game. The sound output device 9) is provided with an effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing. The image to be displayed on the display means is updated each time, and the pre-judgment special hold image or the post-judgment holding image indicating the possibility of performing the special game from the pre-judgment hold image or the post-judgment hold image is shown. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing to a special reserved image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the variation display of the symbol starts. ), And a command indicating the result of the determination (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means, which is predetermined after receiving the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing according to the above. Including a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing, the effect execution means starts the first change effect. Compared to the case where the notification effect is started at the frame update timing to be performed, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-judgment special hold image. It is better to change to a special hold image after the above judgment. , The rate at which the second change effect is executed is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) that controls the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? A determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not the determination is made, and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding a predetermined number of the determination rights, and the slave control means corresponds to the reserved rights. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays a hold image (hold icon) on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification to the effect means (voice output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing an effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means causes the display means to display each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to update the image and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is , Is executed at the frame update timing according to the command (start opening prize designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol memory designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the reserved rights changes. A predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The display mode of the special hold image includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the timing, and the display mode of the special hold image is the first display mode (blue character icon). And a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to perform the special game than the first display mode, and the effect executing means has a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started at, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is higher than when the first change effect is executed. Is more likely to change to the second display mode when is executed, and the first change When changing to the second display mode in the production, the special game is when the number of the reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number than when the number is the first number. I try to be more likely to do. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "special hold image" and "special hold image before judgment" are those in which the shape is changed from the normal hold icon, the color is changed, and the color indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot around the hold icon. One that displays an effect, one that displays a character showing the expectation of winning a jackpot around (nearby) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, "SP") that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon. , "Pseudo-ren", etc.) are included.

In addition, the "special hold image after judgment" is an image in which the shape is changed from the normal icon, a color is changed, and an effect of a color indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed around the icon. A character that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed around (nearby) the icon, and a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ream") that suggests an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the icon. ) Is included.

Further, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Further, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

Further, the "post-judgment hold image" and the "post-judgment special hold image" are displayed from the start to the end of the variation effect, displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect, and the variation. The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those whose display is erased.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In the conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied is stored as a hold memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable effect based on this. In such a gaming machine, an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories is performed, or an execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variation effect is executed is displayed. There was something that made the player grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as hold storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases. Yes, the decrease display (1 subtraction) of the first hold information is performed from the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as hold storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variation effect is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases. When the number of the reserved storages increases, the increase display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information can be executed, and the reserved storages can be displayed during the decreased display of the second reserved information. When the number increases, the first hold is performed even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The increase display of information (update to the reserved number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variable display is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and when the number of the hold storage increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed. Yes, if the number of reserved storages increases during the change display of the second reserved information, the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. If the number of hold storages increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the second hold information (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes, a variation effect executing means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. (Numerical value) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the variation effect execution means is during execution of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) that is expected to execute the special game, and the information display means increases the number of reserved memories, the first reserved information. The increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (1 is added). (Update to the hold number) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged). It is designed not to be done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as hold storage. A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is provided, and the slave control means images a variation effect according to the result of the determination. The variable effect executing means that can be executed by the display means (image display device), the first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of the hold storage, and the second hold information (holding information) indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the hold storage. The information display means includes an information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and the information display means increases the display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of hold memories increases. Is feasible, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as the first reserved storage, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. The determination information based on (the entry of the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as the second hold storage, and when the number of the first hold storage increases in the specific game state, the first hold information The increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second hold information (the last variation effect in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is restored). It is not executed until it is executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. The member 74, the effect button 17), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means operates the operation mode (operation) of the initial operation depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Aspects, light emission modes, etc.) are made different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) capable of being operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and electric power. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the operating means after the start of the power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission and performing the effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game is provided, and the control state of the game is initialized in the effect control means. The light emitting mode (light emitting mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is different between the case where the game is controlled and the case where the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of the power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. ), And the effect control means has an operation mode (number of steps and the number of steps) of the initial operation of the movable effect means depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. The operation mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the operation of each step is the same, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. The movable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect means include a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is used when the control state of the game is initialized. And the case where the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means. Is designed to be different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and a game control state is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state, and the variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the accompanying variable effect is provided, and the plurality of effect symbols include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that can identify each of the effect symbols. When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means as the first combination (for example, "135"), and controls the game. Is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are used as a second combination (for example, "753"). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that perform the initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that a suitable initial operation may not be performed for the movable effect means.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable effect means is returned to the first position. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the movable effect means does not return to the first position. The initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable effect means returns to the first position and the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means is The initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the operation. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In the case of, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means. Is not done. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and the second movable effect means is the first. When it is in the position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means. Is not performed, but the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of itself. The effect control means includes a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having an overlapping portion in the above, and the effect control means is described at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. When the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem that it could be done.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and a game control state is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. Variations of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state and the determination means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an effect, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol that is displayed in the variable is oscillated (temporarily stopped) and then statically displayed (temporarily stopped). (Stop display) is possible, and the effect control means is predetermined when the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect for swinging and displaying the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. At the timing of (when the special symbol confirmation command is received, when the customer waiting command is received), the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into a starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed effect symbols, and the variable effect is provided with a reach state by some of the effect symbols. When the power supply stopped during the execution of the reach effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means includes a reach variation effect of displaying the formation and executing the reach effect. It is possible to display the combination of the effect symbols on the display means in a stationary state, which is different from the reach combination by the effect symbols that formed and displayed the reach state when the special symbol confirmation command is received and the customer waiting command is received). .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restores the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination of the determination means. According to the result, it is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and is in the state of the gaming machine. Is a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, including the second state. The specific display mode (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) is different from that when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 7)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect by a display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the displayed effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means statically displays the effect symbol on the display means. When the predetermined period elapses, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed, and the control state. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different from the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the above or after the restoration of the control state. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variation effect on the display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. An effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped and the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol is provided, and the effect control means causes the display means to perform the effect when the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the symbol, and to the determination information in which the variation effect is being executed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the corresponding execution information (the icon) can be displayed and the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next step is performed from the end of the specific display. Until the variable display is started, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, JP-A-2017-143904). reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the look-ahead notice production is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored. there were.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display is provided, and the effect control means has the variation effect a plurality of times based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice effect is restored. It is possible to execute a notice effect different from the look-ahead notice effect (for example, an alternative notice effect) in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the suspension of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 10)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017). -143904 (see). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the specific production is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored. It was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over a plurality of times of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the above, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is supplied. Although the specific effect can be executed in the variation effect executed after the stopped variation effect, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 11)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the determination information for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the restart of the power supply is high. There was a risk of becoming.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a game machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the advance determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display is provided, and the effect control means includes the determination information and the variation effect for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. It is possible to display the identification information (the icon, the hold icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests a certain degree of expectation, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (for example, a CD icon) and a second stage mode (for example, blue). The power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information that includes the character icon) and the third stage aspect (red character icon) and changes to the third stage aspect in the second stage aspect is resumed in the game. When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 12)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved storages, which is determination information for which determination has not been executed, in the display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the gaming is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved storages, which is a hobby of the gaming. There was a problem that it could decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restores the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination of the determination means. A game control state is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result. When it is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second). A hold display indicating the number of hold storages is displayed in each of the hold display 84) and the second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area. When the power supply that has been stopped with the hold storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is lowered. Can be suppressed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 13)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination is accompanied by the variation display. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the interest of the game is enjoyed when the power supply stopped during the production suggesting the expectation that the special game is executed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. There was a problem that it could be reduced.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes. The means can execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the power supply that has been stopped is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (lighting white or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 14)
A conventional gaming machine includes a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined mode (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. Is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is specified from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. Etc.), it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation) is specified from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When a command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the main control means can execute the variable effect during the execution of the variable effect. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control means can execute the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means, and can execute the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means. , When the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of processes, the operation mode of each process, etc.) is the same. However, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot) capable of executing an effect according to the signal by differentizing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the effect), the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the start port). ), A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and an initial game control state after the start of power supply. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be changed to a state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means is an initial operation (initial operation,) of the effect means. It is possible to execute the effect operation of the movable effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display) with the initial light emission, the notification sound output, and the initial screen display, and the determination of the determination means. Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the effect symbol displayed in the variable display is shaken. It is possible to perform a dynamic display (temporary stop display) and then a static display (stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings and displays the effect symbol. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing (when the special symbol confirmation command is received or when the customer waiting command is received) without swinging the effect symbol. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. Is received, it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect in the state of having the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means. The display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display during the return) when the power supply stopped during the two states is restarted and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is different from that of the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the initial stage It is possible to carry out the operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the effect symbol is statically displayed, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is displayed after the variation time of the variation effect elapses. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different between the case where the static display is performed and the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the control state or the restoration of the control state. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. If so, it is possible to perform the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) over the variable effect a plurality of times, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect resumes. When the control state of the game is restored, the advance notice effect different from the look-ahead advance notice effect (for example, in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the look-ahead advance notice effect) A predetermined signal (power-on designation command) is executed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an alternative notice effect) can be executed and an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. , Power recovery designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, sound output, image display) in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to execute the variation effect a plurality of times. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed stepwise over the variable effect, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power-on designation command,) is performed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed without executing from the continuation of the stage. When the power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes and an operation in a predetermined mode. (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device) and acquisition conditions are satisfied. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (the entry of the game ball into the start port) as the hold storage, and the determination information, the player A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and a game control state is initialized after the start of power supply, or before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) for recovering to the state of It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game is executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. When it is possible to execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting a degree, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is used. The main control during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) capable of controlling a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and executing an effect according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and responds to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the predetermined signal is received. It is possible to output a notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and the game is in progress. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in a non-waiting state (customer waiting state), and receive a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. If so, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and during the execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery) is executed from the main control means. When a designated command or the like) is received, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. A sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during the execution of the special game effect. When (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly link the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 15)
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying an effect image (variable effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is provided. The effect control means can display a game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the effect control means can display the game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol). If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 16)
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Some of such gaming machines execute abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not properly performed.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetism, etc.) is provided. Abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, etc.) is provided. , Radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) Notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) (Notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue executing the error notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games, but the gaming ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game. If this is the case, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

If the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and if the jackpot special symbol type is a specific symbol, the next time after the jackpot game ends. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol has priority. Although it is assumed that it is executed, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

Next, the variation display (the effect executed by using the effect symbols) of the plurality of rows of effect symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the variation effect will be described.

On the image display device 70, at least one of the first and second special symbol hold numbers is 1 or more (or the first and second special symbol hold numbers) in a state where a plurality of rows of effect symbols are stopped and displayed. When both are 0, the variation effect is executed every time the start condition that the game ball enters any of the first and second start ports 45 and 47) is satisfied, and the variation effect is executed with the start of each variation effect. The variable display of the multi-row effect symbols is started, that is, the multi-row effect symbols are variablely displayed, and the variable display of the multi-row effect symbols is terminated with the end of each variable effect, that is, the multi-row effect symbols are displayed. Is stopped and displayed.

For details, when the start condition is satisfied, whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game / small hit game) is determined based on the special figure determination information of 1, and the result of this determination is used. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode) of the special symbol is determined, the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation is displayed in the determined fluctuation pattern, and then the determination is made. The stop symbol is displayed as a stop, and the fluctuation effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation.

That is, in the variation effect, the timing of the variation start and the timing of the variation stop of the special symbol and the effect symbols of the plurality of rows correspond to each other (the same timing), and the plurality of effect symbols are based on the result of the pass / fail judgment. Then, after varying according to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect of stopping in the stop mode suggesting the result of the hit / fail determination (the determined stop symbol of the special symbol) is executed. Then, when the result of the variable display of the effect symbols in a plurality of columns becomes a predetermined special display result, that is, as will be described in detail later, the symbols in the left and right are the special display results in FIGS. 106 (b) (c). ), The special game is executed.

FIG. 106 (a) is a chart showing the types of effect symbols (“1” to “9” (“NEXT” and “★”) used in each of the plurality of rows of effect symbols; the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. These multiple types of effect symbols are scrolled and displayed in a variable manner. Note that the effect symbols "NEXT" and "★" are displayed only in the middle symbol (when the effect symbol "NEXT" is a pseudo sequence (pseudo variation)). The production symbol "★" can be used (when a special game is executed).

As shown in the figure, when the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (the game ball enters the first starting port 45) and when the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 61. Is displayed in a variable manner (the game ball enters the second starting port 47), and the same type of effect symbol is used, but different types of effect symbols may be used.

FIG. 106 (b) is a stop mode determination table for determining the stop mode of the effect symbol at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 106 (c) is a stop mode determination table for determining the stop mode of the effect symbol at the time of a small hit. It is a stop mode determination table.

Based on the table shown in FIG. 106 (b), when the first big hit (the special symbol is any of the special symbols 1 and 5), the stop mode "777" is determined, and the second big hit (the special symbol is any of the special symbols 1 and 5) is determined. In the case of any of the special symbols 2 and 6), any of the stop modes "222", "444", "666" and "888" is determined, and the third big hit (the special symbol is any of the special symbols 3 and 7) is determined. In the case of (or), any of the stop modes "111", "333", "555", and "999" is determined, and in the case of the fourth big hit (the special symbol is the special symbol 4), the stop mode "357" is determined. "1 * 1" "2 * 2" ... "9 * 9" is determined, and the production symbols in multiple rows are finally stopped (mainly stopped) in this determined stop mode. ..

Here, the 4th big hit <2nd big hit <3rd big hit <1st big hit becomes a big hit that is advantageous to the player, and the 1st to 4th big hits having different advantages can be identified (distinguished). As described above, the first to fourth jackpots determine different stopping modes.

Further, based on the table shown in FIG. 106 (c), when a small hit (the special symbol is any of the special symbols 20, 21, 30, and 31), the stop modes "357", "1 * 1", and " Any of "2 * 2" ... "9 * 9" is determined, and the effect symbols in the plurality of rows are finally stopped (mainly stopped) in this determined stop mode.

Here, when comparing the 4th big hit and the small hit, regarding the state after the special game, the 4th big hit is more advantageous to the player than the small hit from the normal game state, but any special game Since the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same, the stop mode in the case of the 4th big hit and the stop mode in the case of the small hit are the same, and apparently (from the stop mode) the 4th big hit and the small hit. It is possible to make it difficult to know which of the hits is being made.

In the case of loss, the stop mode "XZY" (X, Y are XZY) in the case of producing a non-reach effect based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol (normal variation, shortened variation variation pattern). Arbitrary effect symbols that are different from each other, Z is an arbitrary effect symbol (however, other than "357") is determined, and when the effect is to reach (the fluctuation pattern of loss), the stop mode "XYX" (X, (Y is an arbitrary effect symbol that is different from each other) is determined, and the effect symbols in a plurality of rows are finally stopped (main stop) in this determined stop mode.

The gaming machine 1 of the present invention has a first aspect (for example, displayed in high-speed fluctuation) in which a plurality of rows of effect symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state, and a plurality of rows after the first aspect is performed. By controlling the variable display of the effect symbols in a plurality of rows by the second aspect (for example, three symbols in the left and right are displayed together) in which the effect symbols are displayed in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect in each row. In this control, the second aspect is that the first display in which the effect symbols in a plurality of rows can be changed (for example, the three symbols in the left and right are aligned and displayed in a swinging state) and the effect symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed. The display can be controlled by the second display (for example, the three symbols in the left and right are aligned and displayed in a stationary state), and the second display is performed in at least a part of the transition from the first display to the second display. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a stop suggestion effect; the display of the three symbols in the left and right is temporarily changed) that suggests the transition to the display.

In other words, in the variation effect, after scrolling the effect symbols in a plurality of rows (first aspect) and then temporarily stopping (first display of the second aspect; stopping in a swinging state) in a predetermined aspect, the effect is changed. It is possible to perform the main stop (second display of the second aspect; stop in the stationary state) with a predetermined mode as the stop mode, and suggest that the main stop is performed in the temporarily stopped state before the main stop. It is configured so that the stop suggestion effect can be executed, that is, the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed.

FIG. 107 is an effect content determination table for determining the content of the variation effect, and based on this table, the effect content includes the reach effect and the pseudo-ream number of times according to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol. At the same time as being determined, the temporary stop time from the time when a plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode until the final stop is performed with the predetermined mode as the stop mode, and whether or not the stop suggestion effect is executed at the time of the main stop. Is determined.

Next, the display of a plurality of rows of effect symbols in the variable effect will be described in detail, and then the stop suggestion effect will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 108, when the start condition is satisfied while (1) the symbols in the left and right (for example, "123") have stopped fluctuating, (2) the symbols in the left and right start to fluctuate, and then left and right. The symbols inside scroll and fluctuate in rows. This scroll fluctuation is basically performed so that the speed fluctuates immediately after the start of the fluctuation so that the symbols in the left and right are transparent or difficult to see, and then the speed is decelerated toward the stop. It is done like this.

Then, when (3) the left symbol "X" is stopped, and then (4) the right symbol "Y" different from the left symbol "X" is stopped, "reach" is not established, and then (5) the middle symbol "X" is stopped. "Z" fluctuates and stops, and the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "XZY", and then (6) the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the predetermined mode "XZY" as the stop mode.

When the series of fluctuation effects from FIGS. 108 (1) to (6) is "XZY" ≠ "357", "variation without loss reach (variation patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. 107)", and "XZY" = " In the case of "357", it becomes "variation without big hit reach (variation pattern 18 in FIG. 107)" or "variation without small hit reach (variation patterns 1, 21 in FIG. 107)".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108, when (3) the left symbol "X" is stopped and then (7) the same right symbol "X" as the left symbol "X" is stopped, (8) "reach" is established. After that, without shifting to "SP reach" or "SPSP reach", (9) the middle symbol "Y" different from the left and right symbols "X" is stopped, and the left and right middle symbols are in the predetermined mode "XYX". A temporary stop state is set, and then (10) the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the predetermined mode "XYX" as the stop mode.

When the series of fluctuation effects from FIGS. 108 (1) to (10) is "Y" ≠ "★", it becomes "lost normal reach fluctuation (variation patterns 3 and 4 in FIG. 107)", and "Y" = "★". In the case of "", it becomes "big hit normal reach variation (variation patterns 19, 20 in FIG. 107)" or "small hit normal reach variation (variation patterns 22, 23 in FIG. 107)".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108, after (8) "reach" is established, (11) the left and right symbols "X" and "X" are moved to the corner side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and (12) "SP". "Reach" is executed, or (18) "SPSP reach" is executed. Basically, "SPSP reach" has a higher expectation of big hits than "SP reach".

In the "SP reach" of (12), for example, a mission effect of displaying a moving image in which the main character performs some mission and finally succeeds or fails is executed. As this mission effect, there are a plurality of mission effects having different jackpot expectations, and one of them is selected and executed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

Then, at the end of this "SP reach", for example, the main character fails the mission, (13) the middle symbol "Y" different from the left and right symbols "X" stops, and the left and right middle symbols are in a predetermined mode. It becomes a temporary stop state at "XYX", and then (14) the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the predetermined mode "XYX" as the stop mode, or, for example, the main character succeeds in the mission, and (15) the left and right The middle symbol "X" which is the same as the symbol "X" is stopped, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "XXX", and then (16) the symbols in the left and right are in the predetermined mode "XXX". Is the stop mode, and the main stop is performed.

The series of variation effects shown in FIGS. 108 (1) to (14) becomes the "loss SP reach variation (variation patterns 5 to 7 in FIG. 107)", and the series of variation effects shown in FIGS. 108 (1) to (16). Is the "big hit SP reach variation (variation patterns 11 to 13 in FIG. 107)".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108, (13) after the middle symbol "Y" different from the left and right symbols "X" is stopped and the left and right middle symbols are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "XYX". (17) The middle symbol is restarted, the left and right symbols "X" and "X" are moved to the corner side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and (18) "SPSP reach" is executed.

In the "SPSP reach" of (18), for example, a battle effect is executed in which a video in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character and finally wins or is defeated is displayed. As this battle effect, there are a plurality of battle effects having different jackpot expectations, and one of them is selected and executed based on the result of the winning / failing determination.

Then, at the end of this "SPSP reach", for example, the ally character is defeated, (19) the middle symbol "Y" different from the left and right symbols "X" stops, and the left and right middle symbols are in the predetermined mode "XYX". , And then (20) the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the predetermined mode "XYX" as the stop mode, or, for example, the ally character wins, and (21) the symbols "X" on the left and right. The same middle symbol "X" is stopped, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "XXX", and then (22) the symbols in the left and right are in the predetermined mode "XXX" as the stop mode. This stop.

The series of variation effects shown in FIGS. 108 (1) to (20) becomes the "loss SPSP reach variation (variation patterns 8 to 10 in FIG. 107)", and the series of variation effects shown in FIGS. 108 (1) to (22). Is the "big hit SPSP reach variation (variation patterns 14 to 16 in FIG. 107)".

Although the display of a plurality of effect symbols corresponding to the "big hit full rotation reach variation (variation pattern 17 in FIG. 107)" is omitted, for example, after the "reach" in FIG. 108 (8) is established. From the predetermined timing of, the symbols in the left and right are aligned with the same symbol "XXX", and the "XXX" is switched from "111" → "222" ... → "999" → "111" ... After scrolling at a relatively low speed as described above, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "XXX", which is one of them, and then the symbols in the left and right are in the predetermined mode "XXX" as the stop mode. This will stop.

In addition, in FIGS. 108 (5), (9), (13), (15), (19), and (21), the symbols in the left and right are basically the same predetermined modes as the initially determined stop mode (hereinafter, final provisional). Temporarily stop in the stop mode).

Although not shown, in the variation effect including the pseudo-ream (pseudo-variation), the left and right symbols "X" and "Y" (or "X") are before the "reach" of FIG. 108 (8) is finally established. "X") is stopped, then the middle symbol "NEXT" is stopped, and the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the predetermined mode "X · NEXT · Y" (or "X · NEXT · X"). After that, the symbols in the left and right are restarted, so that the pseudo-ream is performed, and the number of times (once or twice) becomes the pseudo-ream number.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 108 (15) and (21), before the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", for example, in "SP reach", after the mission failure is produced, " In "SPSP Reach", after the battle is defeated, the battle is temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "XYX" corresponding to the reach loss, and the final temporary stop mode "XYX" is restored to the final temporary stop mode "XXX". It is configured so that the resurrection suggestion effect can be executed, that is, the resurrection suggestion effect may or may not be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, (1) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "XYX", (2) the revival suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the middle left and right. The symbol of is revived from the pre-final temporary stop mode "XYX" to the final temporary stop mode "XXX", temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", and (4) the final temporary stop mode "XXX" is stopped. This is stopped as an aspect.

Further, as described above, the jackpot is advantageous to the player in the order of the second jackpot <third jackpot <first jackpot, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the stop mode corresponding to the first jackpot is "777". The stop modes corresponding to the second big hit are "222", "444", "666", and "888", and the stop modes corresponding to the third big hit are "111", "333", "555", and "999".

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 108 (15) and (21), before the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" corresponding to the second big hit or the third big hit is made. From the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" ("222" etc.) corresponding to the second big hit, the final temporary stop mode "XXX" ("333" etc.) corresponding to the third big hit or the first big hit Or "777"), and from the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" ("333" etc.) corresponding to the third big hit, the final temporary stop mode "XXX" ("XXX") corresponding to the first big hit. It is configured so that the promotion suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of promotion to "777") can be executed, that is, the promotion suggestion effect may or may not be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, (1) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "222", (2) the promotion suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the middle left and right. The symbol of is temporarily stopped in the same final temporary stop mode "222" as the final temporary stop mode, and (4) the final temporary stop mode "222" is used as the stop mode for the main stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, (5) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "333" which is promoted by one step from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (6) the final temporary stop mode. The main stop is performed with the stop mode "333" as the stop mode. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, (7) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "777" which is promoted by two stages from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (8) the final temporary stop mode. This stop is performed with the stop mode "777" as the stop mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, (1) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "333", (2) the promotion suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the symbols in the left and right are executed. Temporarily stops in the same final temporary stop mode "333" as the final temporary stop mode, and (4) the final temporary stop mode "333" is used as the stop mode for the main stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, (5) the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "777" which is promoted by one step from the pre-final temporary stop mode, and (6) the final temporary stop mode. This stop is performed with the stop mode "777" as the stop mode.

Therefore, in the variable effect in which the promotion suggestion effect is executed, when the final temporary stop mode "XXX" is not promoted from the pre-final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" through the promotion suggestion effect (FIG. 110 (3), FIG. 111 (3). )), The final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" is set to be the same as the initially determined stop mode, and the final temporary stop mode "XXX" is changed to the final temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" through the promotion suggestion effect. When promoted from (Fig. 110 (5) (7), Fig. 111 (5)), the pre-term temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" corresponds to a jackpot that is less advantageous than the jackpot corresponding to the initially determined stop mode. It is set to be the same as the stop mode to be performed.

The stop suggestion effect will be explained in detail.
In the stop suggestion effect, a plurality of effect symbols (designs in the left and right) are temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode (final temporary stop mode), and then the predetermined mode is temporarily stopped before being stopped as a stop mode. When the stop suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the plurality of effect symbols are finally stopped with the predetermined mode as the stop mode, but it is not executed in all the variable effects. It may or may not be executed.

In the case of the present embodiment, it is the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 107 that defines whether or not to execute the stop suggestion effect, that is, whether or not the stop suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed at the time of execution, a plurality of tentatively stopped in the variation effect depending on the variation pattern (effect content) determined at the time of execution of the variation effect and from a different viewpoint. Whether or not to execute the stop suggestion effect is determined according to the final temporary stop mode of the effect symbol (that is, the initially determined stop mode (the stop mode that is later finally stopped)).

That is, in the "variation without reach (variation patterns 1, 2, 18, 21 in FIG. 107)" shown in FIG. 112 (1), the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XZY", and then stopped. The suggestion effect is not executed, and the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the final temporary stop mode "XZY" as the stop mode.

FIG. 112 (2) shows a “variation with reach” that executes any one of “normal reach”, “SP reach”, “SPSP reach”, and “full rotation reach”, and FIG. 112 (3) shows “SP reach”. After, "SPSP reach" is executed, and "variation with reach" is shown.

In the "variation with reach (variation patterns 3 to 17, 19, 20, 22, 23 in FIG. 107)" shown in FIG. 112 (2), any of "normal reach", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach". After the execution, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XXX", and then the stop suggestion effect is executed, and even after the execution of this stop suggestion effect, the final temporary stop mode is used. After the temporary stop state of is continued for a while, the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the final temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XXX" as the stop mode.

Alternatively, after any one of "normal reach", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" is executed, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XaXaXa", and then. , The stop suggestion effect is not executed, the symbols in the left and right are restarted, the revival suggestion effect or the promotion suggestion effect is executed, and then the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", and then. , The stop suggestion effect is executed, and after the temporary stop state in the final temporary stop mode continues for a while even after the execution of this stop suggestion effect, the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the final temporary stop mode "XXX" as the stop mode. To do.

In the "variation with reach (a part of the fluctuation patterns 8 to 10 and a part of the fluctuation patterns 14 to 16 in FIG. 107)" shown in FIG. 112 (3), after the "SP reach" is executed, the symbols in the left and right are in the middle. Is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop mode "XYX", and then the middle symbol is restarted and "SPSP reach" is executed without executing the stop suggestion effect.

After the "SPSP reach" is executed, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XXX", and then the stop suggestion effect is executed, and the final temporary stop effect is executed even after the execution of the stop suggestion effect. After the temporary stop state in the stop mode continues for a while, the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the final temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XXX" as the stop mode.

Alternatively, after "SPSP reach" is executed, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the pre-term temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XaXaXa", and then the symbols in the left and right are re-started without executing the stop suggestion effect. After starting and executing the resurrection suggestion effect or promotion suggestion effect, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", and then the stop suggestion effect is executed, and after the execution of this stop suggestion effect. After the temporary stop state in the final temporary stop mode continues for a while, the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with the final temporary stop mode "XXX" as the stop mode. It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 112 (2) and 112 (3), when the stop suggestion effect is executed, it has been explained that the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped after the temporary stop state continues for a while even after the execution of the stop suggestion effect. However, after the execution of the stop suggestion effect, the main stop may be performed immediately without the temporary stop state (or after the temporary stop state is set for a very short time (which is difficult for the player to recognize)).

The stop suggestion effect is executed in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player who is looking at the image display device 70, and as an example of this stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 113 (1) and 113 (2), the left and right middle The same stop suggestion effect is executed regardless of whether the symbol of is temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XYX" corresponding to the reach loss or in the final temporary stop mode "XXX" corresponding to the big hit. Note that FIG. 113 (3) shows a case where the stop suggestion effect is not executed when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode “XZY” corresponding to the loss without reach.

The stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 113 (1) and 113 (2) is executed by using the effect symbol. Specifically, each symbol in the left and right has a symbol body (number) and a symbol frame surrounding the symbol body. At least a part of the left and right symbols temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XYX" or "XXX" temporarily changes from the normal mode (for example, decoration in the symbol frame of each symbol). When (color, etc.) changes, the inside of the symbol frame of each symbol shines, the symbol body of each symbol expands, etc.), the stop suggestion effect is executed.

However, in addition to the stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 113 (1) and 113 (2), the stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 can be applied. The stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 114 is similarly executed using the effect symbol, but specifically, the stop is temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode “XYX” or “XXX” (“XXX” in the figure). The entire symbol in the left and right is temporarily changed from the normal temporary stop state (swinging state) to a unique temporary stop state (for example, each symbol makes one rotation by rotation), so that the stop suggestion effect is executed. Will be done.

The stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 is mainly executed by displaying a symbol other than the effect symbol on the image display device 70, and specifically, provisionally in the final temporary stop mode “XYX” or “XXX” (“XXX” in the figure). The stopped symbols on the left and right are temporarily hidden by the display on the image display device 70 (for example, the display that can be opened after the entire screen is closed by a sliding door), so that the pattern is stopped in a way that changes the scene. The suggestion effect is executed.

If there are multiple types of stop suggestion effects, which one to execute is based on the variation pattern (effect content), stop mode (temporary stop mode), effect mode, game state, etc. determined as a result of the hit / fail judgment. It is possible to decide and use multiple types of stop suggestion effects properly. For example, it is possible to execute the stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 113 at the time of loss, and to execute the stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 at the time of a big hit. In addition, also in FIGS. 114 and 115, after the stop suggestion effect is executed, the main stop is performed immediately (or after the temporary stop state is set for a very short time (which is difficult for the player to recognize)) without the temporary stop state. May be good.

By the way, according to the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 107, the gaming machine 1 of the present invention relates to the final temporary stop mode (stop mode), the hit / fail judgment, the variation pattern (effect content), and the gaming state with respect to the stop suggestion effect. , Has the following feature configurations.

[Final temporary stop mode and stop suggestion effect]
First, as described above, the final temporary stop mode of the symbols in the left and right is the stop mode when the main stop is performed thereafter, but as shown in FIG. 116, the final temporary stop mode (stop mode) is a loss without reach. It is classified into eyes, lost eyes with reach, hits without reach, and hits with reach.

Then, when compared with the table shown in FIG. 107 and the time chart shown in FIG. 112, when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped as the final temporary stop mode with no reach loss (variation patterns 1 and 2). , And when the player is temporarily stopped at the hit without reach (variation patterns 18 and 21), the stop suggestion effect is not executed, and the player is temporarily stopped at the loss with reach (variation pattern 3 to 10), and the hit with reach. When the temporary stop is performed by the eyes (variation patterns 11 to 17, 19, 20, 22, 23), the stop suggestion effect is executed.

In the state where the player is temporarily stopped at the loss without reach and the hit without reach, there is no possibility that the subsequent development effect is executed, so the stop suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the state of being temporarily stopped due to the loss with reach, there is a possibility that the revival suggestion effect will be executed as the development effect after that, and when the temporary stop is performed after the "SP reach", the "SPSP reach" will be used as the development effect. Because there is a possibility that "" will be executed, and in the state where it is temporarily stopped due to reach, there is a possibility that a promotion suggestion effect will be executed as a development effect after that, so the stop suggestion effect should be executed. I have to.

That is, in the state where the player is temporarily stopped at the loss with reach and the hit with reach, the player can be expected to execute the development effect until the stop suggestion effect is executed, and the stop suggestion effect is produced. By being executed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable effect ends without executing the development effect, and thus it is possible to maintain the moderation of the game progress and improve the game interest, and in particular, the relevant When the next effect (variable effect, hit effect) is continuously performed after the end of the variable effect, the break (boundary) between the continuous effects can be easily understood by executing the stop suggestion effect.

In some cases, as the final temporary stop mode, even when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped at the loss without reach or at the hit without reach, other elements (variation pattern (effect) in the fluctuation). Depending on the content), effect mode, game state, etc.), the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed, or even if the stop suggestion effect is temporarily stopped due to a loss with reach or a hit with reach. , Depending on the other factors mentioned above, there are times when the stop suggestion effect is not executed and times when it is executed. It is also possible to make it easier or harder to execute the stop suggestion effect than in the case of temporarily stopping with no loss (or loss with reach and loss without reach). In addition, when the temporary stop is performed at the hit, the stop suggestion effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of reach.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, the hit and the lost eyes with reach are set as a special mode and the lost eyes without reach are set as a predetermined mode, or the hit eyes are set as a special mode and the lost eyes with reach and no reach are set. Assuming that the loss is a predetermined mode, when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped and then the main stop is performed (when the variable display is controlled from the first display to the second display), the symbols in the left and right hit at least in the left and right. The feature is that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs between the case where it is displayed in a special mode including a part of the eyes (special display result; big hit eye) and the case where it is displayed in a predetermined mode different from the special mode. Become.

[Pass / fail judgment and stop suggestion production]
According to the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 107, the second special symbol is displayed even in the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the first special symbol display device (which is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 45). Even in the big hit lottery that involves the operation of the device (which is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 47), if there is a loss, the ratio is about 8.2% (8/98) (variation pattern 3 to). The stop suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10). On the other hand, in the big hit lottery involving the operation of the first special symbol display device, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of 98% (1-10 / 100 × 20/100) (the ratio of fluctuation patterns 11 to 17, 19, 20). When the stop suggestion effect is executed and a small hit is obtained, the stop suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 50% (a rate of variation patterns 22 and 23). Further, in the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the second special symbol display device, the stop suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100% (the rate of fluctuation patterns 11 to 17) when the big hit is obtained, and when the small hit is obtained, the stop is stopped. The suggestion effect is not executed.

In particular, in the case of a big hit, if the player is temporarily stopped at the hit point with reach, the promotion suggestion effect may be executed as the development effect after that, so the stop suggestion effect is executed. That is, in the state of being temporarily stopped with a reach, it is possible to expect the player to execute the development effect until the stop suggestion effect is executed, and thus the moderation of the game progress is maintained. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment, and in particular, since the next production (hit production) is continuously performed after the end of the fluctuation production, the break (boundary) between the continuous productions is performed by executing the stop suggestion production. ) Can be made easy to understand.

In some cases, as in the case of the above, even when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped at the loss without reach or at the hit without reach as the final temporary stop mode, other factors (variations in the fluctuation). Depending on the pattern (content of the effect), effect mode, game state, etc.), the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed, or it may be temporarily stopped with a missed eye with reach or a hit with reach. Even in the case of making it, depending on the other factors mentioned above, there are times when the stop suggestion effect is not executed and times when it is executed, so that the stop suggestion effect is more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not a big hit. It is also possible to make it easy or difficult to execute.

That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present invention is characterized in that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs depending on whether the game machine 1 is a big hit or not.

[Variation pattern and stop suggestion effect]
First, as shown in FIG. 117, the variation patterns of the special symbols are classified into a loss variation pattern without reach, a loss variation pattern with reach, a variation pattern without reach, and a variation pattern with reach.

Then, when compared with the table shown in FIG. 107 and the time chart shown in FIG. 112, when the symbols in the left and right are changed according to the no-reach loss fluctuation pattern (variation patterns 1 and 2), and no reach. When it is changed according to the hit fluctuation pattern (variation patterns 18 and 21), the stop suggestion effect is not executed, and when it is changed according to the reach loss fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3 to 10) and when there is reach. When the variation is made according to the variation pattern (variation patterns 11 to 17, 19, 20, 22, 23), the stop suggestion effect is executed.

When it is changed according to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern and the non-reach hit fluctuation pattern, there is no possibility that the subsequent development effect will be executed in the state of being temporarily stopped at the non-reach loss stitch and the non-reach hit hit. Therefore, the stop suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, when it is changed according to the loss fluctuation pattern with reach, in the state of being temporarily stopped at the loss with reach, there is a possibility that the revival suggestion effect is executed as the development effect after that. "SPSP reach" may be executed as a development effect at the time of temporary stop after ", and when it is changed according to the variation pattern with reach, it is in the state of temporary stop with reach. After that, there is a possibility that the promotion suggestion effect will be executed as the development effect, so the stop suggestion effect is executed.

That is, when the variation is made according to the reach-with loss fluctuation pattern and the reach-with-hit fluctuation pattern, the player is in a state of being temporarily stopped at the reach-with loss-eye and the reach-with-hit-eye until the stop suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to expect the development effect to be executed, and by executing the stop suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variation effect ends without executing the development effect. It is possible to maintain moderation of progress and improve the entertainment of the game. In particular, when the next production (variation production, hit production) is continuously performed after the end of the fluctuation production, the stop suggestion production is executed. It is possible to make it easy to understand the breaks (boundaries) between continuous productions.

In some cases, even if the variation display of the symbols in the left and right is performed according to the non-reach loss variation pattern or the non-reach hit variation pattern, other elements (contents of the effect in the variation). Depending on the stop mode of the symbols in multiple rows, the effect mode, the game state, etc.), the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed, or there may be a loss variation pattern with reach or a hit variation with reach. Even if it is performed according to the pattern, depending on the other factors mentioned above, the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed, and the hit variation pattern and the reach loss variation pattern (or the loss variation pattern) may be executed. When it is performed according to the hit variation pattern), it is easier or executed to execute the stop suggestion effect than when it is performed according to the reachless loss variation pattern (or the reach loss variation pattern and the reachless loss variation pattern). It can be difficult.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, the hit variation pattern and the loss variation pattern with reach are set as the first variation mode, the loss variation pattern without reach is set as the second variation mode, or the hit variation pattern is the first variation mode. Assuming that the variation mode of 1 is the loss variation pattern with reach and the loss variation pattern without reach as the second variation mode, the variation display of the symbols in the left and right is performed according to the first variation mode including the hit variation pattern. It is characterized in that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not the first variation mode is used and the second variation mode is different from the first variation mode.

[Game state and stop suggestion effect]
First, as described above, as the game states in which the game is controlled, the "low probability non-time saving game state"("low probability game state" and "non-time saving game state") and the "high probability time saving game state"("high" There are "probability game state" and "time saving game state"). For example, it is usually controlled in "low probability non-time saving game state", and after the big hit is completed, it is in "high probability time saving game state" until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be controlled.

In the "low probability non-time saving game state", the jackpot winning probability is set as low as 2/600, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result is set long, and the second starting port 47 at the time of winning is set. The opening time is set short, and in the "high accuracy time short game state", the jackpot winning probability is set as high as 10/600, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result is set short, and the winning is won. The opening time of the second starting port 47 at the time is set to be long.

Therefore, in the "low probability non-time saving game state", the jackpot winning probability is low; 2/600, which is accompanied by the operation of the first special symbol display device (triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45). The execution rate of the big hit lottery (which is performed) is significantly higher than the execution rate of the big hit lottery which accompanies the operation of the second special symbol display device (which is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 47). On the other hand, in the "high probability time saving game state", the jackpot winning probability is high; at 10/600, the execution rate of the jackpot lottery accompanied by the operation of the second special symbol display device is the operation of the first special symbol display device. It will be significantly higher than the execution rate of the big hit lottery that accompanies it.

Then, when compared with the table shown in FIG. 107, the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect when controlled by the "low probability non-time saving game state" (mainly the display on the first special symbol display device) is ". It is lower than the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect when controlled by the "high-accuracy time-short game state" (mainly the display on the second special symbol display device).

Alternatively, if the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 118 (the shaded area is the changed part from FIG. 107) is adopted instead of the effect content determination table shown in FIG. The execution rate of the stop suggestion effect when controlled by "state" (mainly displayed on the second special symbol display device) is "low probability non-time saving game state" (mainly displayed on the first special symbol display device). ) Is lower than the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect.

It should be noted that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect is set to be higher or lower when controlled in the "low probability non-time saving game state" than when controlled in the "high probability time saving game state". In addition, the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 107 or FIG. 118 may be changed, and the effect content determination table used when controlled in the "low probability non-time saving game state" and the "high accuracy time saving game" The effect content determination table used when controlled by the "state" may be provided separately as tables that are different from each other.

That is, when the gaming machine 1 of the present invention is controlled in the first gaming state, assuming that the "low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is the first gaming state and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is the second gaming state. It is a feature that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs between the case where the game is controlled in the second game state and the case where the game is controlled in the second game state.

Next, the time during which the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped will be described in detail.
First, ΔT1 to ΔT23 shown in FIG. 107 indicate the temporary stop time from the time when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode (not the intermediate temporary stop mode or the pre-final temporary stop mode) to the final stop. ing.

Here, when these temporary stop times ΔT1 to ΔT23 are classified into a loss temporary stop time without reach, a temporary stop time with reach, and a temporary stop time per hit as shown in FIG. 119, they are basically (in most cases). , The temporary stop time without reach can be made longer in the order of <Temporary stop time with loss with reach <Temporary stop time per hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120, after the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode, the stop suggestion effect is executed until the final temporary stop mode is set as the stop mode and the final stop is performed (loss with reach). The case (1) in which the stop suggestion effect is not executed (temporary stop at the hit without reach and the hit without reach) is compared with the case (2). Here, if the temporary stop time when the stop suggestion effect is executed is TA and the temporary stop time when the stop suggestion effect is not executed is TB, as described above, TA> TB, but in some cases TA <TB. It is also possible to.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, assuming that the temporary stop time; TA is the first time and the temporary stop time; TB is the second time, the symbols in the left and right are the final temporary stop modes when the stop suggestion effect is executed. The first time (TA) from the time of the temporary stop to the main stop (from the first display to the second display) and when the stop suggestion effect is not executed, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode. It is characterized in that the second time (TB) from the time of stopping to the time of the main stop (from the first display to the second display) is different.

In particular, by setting TA> TB, when the stop suggestion effect is executed, the time for executing the stop suggestion effect is assured between the temporary stop in the final temporary stop mode of the symbols in the left and right and the final stop. In addition to securing the above, the stop suggestion effect is executed so as to be difficult to understand immediately after the temporary stop in the final temporary stop mode of the symbol, or the main stop of the symbol is performed so as to be difficult to understand immediately after the execution of the stop suggestion effect. Since it is possible to execute the stop suggestion effect at an appropriate timing so that the player can easily understand it, the moderation of the game progress and the improvement of the game interest can be surely achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), when the stop suggestion effect is executed, the time from the time when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode; when TA1 elapses, the stop suggestion effect is executed and the stop suggestion effect is executed. Time from the time when is executed; when TA2 elapses, the symbols in the left and right stop, and TA1> TA2 (in some cases, TA1 <TA2 or TA1 = TA2) may be set between TA1 and TA2. It is configured so that the relationship that becomes (possible) is established.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (2), when the stop suggestion effect is not executed, the time from the time when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode; In between, the relationship of TA1> TB (or, in some cases, TA1 <TB can be set) is established.

By setting TA1> TB, it is possible to expect the player to execute the development effect until the stop suggestion effect is executed, but the time can be made longer than that of TB to enhance the interest. By setting TA1> TA2, after the stop suggestion effect is executed, the symbols in the left and right can be quickly stopped so as not to give the player excessive expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121, after the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode, the stop suggestion effect is executed before the final temporary stop mode is set as the stop mode and the final stop is performed (1). , After temporarily stopping the symbols in the left and right in the middle temporary stop mode, the pre-final temporary stop mode, or the pseudo-ream mode, restart and develop the effect ("SPSP reach" from "SP reach", revival suggestion effect). , Promotion suggestion effect, pseudo-ream (pseudo-variation)) is compared with (2). Here, let the temporary stop time when executing the development effect be TC.

As shown in FIG. 121 (2), when the development effect is executed, the time from the time when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped in the intermediate temporary stop mode, the pre-term temporary stop mode, or the pseudo-ream mode; It starts and the development effect is executed, but it is configured so that a relationship of TA1 <TC (or, in some cases, TA1> TC or TA1 = TC can be established) is established between TA1 and TC. There is.

By setting TA1 <TC, when executing the development effect, the player has experience that if the stop suggestion effect is executed when the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped and then the main stop is performed, the stop is performed. Feeling that the time (TA1) that the suggestion production should be executed has passed, expecting that the development production will be executed without stopping, although it is a short time before the development production is actually executed. Since it can be enhanced, the interest is improved.

Here, in the effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 107 and 118, the stop suggestion effect is executed in the fluctuation that becomes the normal reach, but instead of this table, the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 122 is adopted. Then, in the fluctuation that becomes the normal reach, the stop suggestion effect is prevented from being executed, and the above-mentioned [final temporary stop mode and stop suggestion effect] [hit / fail judgment and stop suggestion effect] [variation pattern and stop suggestion effect] [game state] It is possible to follow the comparison of each execution rate of the stop suggestion effect shown in each of [and stop suggestion effect].

It is possible to add the following configuration to the temporary stop of the symbols in the left and right.
(1) The execution rate of the revival suggestion effect is different between the normal reach fluctuation and the SP reach fluctuation (or SPSP reach fluctuation) (SP reach fluctuation (or SPSP reach fluctuation) has a higher execution rate than the normal reach fluctuation, or Low).
(2) The temporary stop time from the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped to the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped is different depending on whether the revival suggestion effect is not executed or executed (than when the revival suggestion effect is not executed). The temporary stop time is longer or shorter when it is also executed).

(3) The execution rate of the promotion suggestion effect is different between the normal reach fluctuation and the SP reach fluctuation (or SPSP reach fluctuation) (SP reach fluctuation (or SPSP reach fluctuation) has a higher execution rate than the normal reach fluctuation, or Low).
(4) The temporary stop time from the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped to the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped is different between the case where the promotion suggestion effect is not executed and the case where the promotion suggestion effect is executed (from the case where the promotion suggestion effect is not executed). The temporary stop time is longer or shorter when it is also executed).

(5) As described above, regarding the temporary stop time from the time when the symbol is temporarily stopped to the time when it is finally stopped, basically (in most cases), the temporary stop time without reach <the temporary stop time with loss <hit provisional The temporary stop time becomes longer in the order of the stop time, that is, the longer the temporary stop time, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present invention has the following characteristic configuration with respect to the stop suggestion effect.
[Look-ahead production (chance eye of production design) and stop suggestion production]
As described above, FIG. 116 illustrates the non-reach lost eyes of the effect pattern, but as shown in FIG. 123 (1), the non-reach lost eyes are the normal lost eyes, the first chance eye, and the second. It is possible to change the jackpot expectation with subsequent fluctuations depending on the type of non-reach lost eye that is classified as a chance eye and the symbols in the left and right are the final temporary stop mode. For example, the first chance is a roll in which the sum of the numbers of the symbols in the left and right is 7, the second chance is a roll in which the symbol in the middle is "7", and the other chances are normal misses. To do.

FIG. 123 (2) shows a table for determining the type of non-reach loss in which the symbols in the left and right stop in the case of the change without reach. Using this table, for example, based on the result of the above-mentioned preliminary determination, neither the special figure determination information that is a loss with reach nor the special figure determination information that is a hit is stored in the hold storage area (Fig. Left). In the case of (loss without reach), the special figure judgment information that is a loss with reach is stored, and if the special figure judgment information that is a hit is not stored (loss with reach in the figure), the special figure judgment information that is a hit is stored. In addition to the case where it is (the hit on the right side of the figure), one of the normal loss, the first chance, and the second chance is determined at the ratio shown in the figure.

As a result, the symbols in the left and right are usually stopped at the first chance rather than at the first chance, and at the second chance than at the first chance. However, it can be expected that it will be a hit with subsequent fluctuations. In addition, when the symbols in the left and right are stopped at the chance eye, a special image such as an effect image that is not displayed when the symbol is normally stopped at the missed eye is displayed in or around the symbol, or the book is normally lost. A special sound that is not output when the vehicle is stopped is output, and an effect that emphasizes the final stop is executed at the chance. If the fluctuation is a loss with reach or a hit, the symbols in the left and right will not stop at the chance in the fluctuation.

Then, in light of the table shown in FIG. 107 and the time chart shown in FIG. 112, when the symbols in the left and right are finally stopped with a non-reach loss eye, whether the non-reach loss eye is a normal loss eye or a chance eye. Regardless of whether or not, the stop suggestion effect is not executed, but when the main stop is performed with a roll other than the reachless missed roll, the roll is not a chance and the stop suggestion effect is executed. In some cases (many).

That is, when the main stop is made at the chance eye, the display is different from that of the normal stop at the missed eye. Therefore, by the effect of emphasizing that the main stop is made at the chance eye, the main stop is made before the main stop. It is possible to notify the player of the main stop or the main stop without executing the suggestion effect.

On the other hand, in the state where the player is temporarily stopped at the hit and the missed eyes with reach, which is not a chance, the player can expect the development effect to be executed until the stop suggestion effect is executed, and the stop suggestion is performed. By executing the production, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable production ends without executing the development production, thereby maintaining the moderation of the game progress and improving the game interest, in particular. When the next effect (variation effect, jackpot effect) is continuously performed after the end of the variation effect, the break (boundary) between the continuous effects can be easily understood by executing the stop suggestion effect.

In some cases, even if the symbols in the left and right are stopped at the missed eyes with reach, a chance eye is set for a part of the lost eyes with reach, and whether or not the lost eyes with reach are chance eyes. Regardless of this, the stop suggestion effect is executed, and even when the main stop is made with a missed eye or a big hit with reach, the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed. It is also possible to make it more difficult or easier to execute the stop suggestion effect when the main stop is performed at the chance eye than when the main stop is performed at a roll other than the chance eye.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, if the chance eye is a special mode and the outcome other than the chance eye is a normal mode, the symbols in the left and right are temporarily stopped and then the main stop is performed (second display mode). ), Based on the result of the preliminary judgment, there are cases where the symbols in the left and right are displayed in a special mode in which a big hit is expected (with subsequent fluctuations), and cases in which the symbols are displayed in a normal mode different from the special mode. The feature is that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect is different.

[Look-ahead effect (change of the variable icon and hold icon) and stop suggestion effect]
As described above, based on the result of the preliminary judgment (variation pattern (effect content)), the final display mode (CD, blue character, green character, red character, zebra character (not shown)) of the icon (hold icon, the variation icon). ), Either of the rainbow characters) is determined (Fig. 16), and when the final display mode of the icon is determined other than the CD, the change scenario is determined based on the determined final display mode and the number of holds. (Fig. 17), the display mode of the icon changes according to the scenario.

According to the table shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot expectation of the display mode of the icon increases in the order of CD <blue character <green character <red character <zebra character <rainbow character, and fluctuation of loss without reach (variation pattern). Regarding the icons corresponding to 1 and 2), the final display mode will not be a display mode (blue character, green character, red character, zebra character, rainbow character) higher than the blue character (maintained on the CD). For icons that correspond to fluctuations other than non-reach loss, the final display mode may be a display mode that is greater than or equal to the blue character.

Further, according to the table shown in FIG. 17, for an icon whose final display mode is a blue character or higher, the display mode of the icon corresponding to the icon is the final display mode, that is, the display mode of the icon that becomes the variable icon is the final display mode. The display mode of the icon that is the hold icon before the change, that is, the change before the change of the change corresponding to the icon, that is, the change icon may or may not be the final display mode, and is not the final display mode. In this case, the display mode is less than the final display mode (for example, if the final display mode is a blue character, it is a CD, and if the final display mode is a zebra character, it is either a CD, a blue character, or a green character).

Then, when compared with the table shown in FIG. 107 and the time chart shown in FIG. 112, the variable icon and the hold icon before one change, which is the variable icon, are changed to icons whose final display mode is blue character or higher. The rate at which the corresponding fluctuation becomes the reach variation, that is, the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect is higher than the rate at which the variation corresponding to the icon whose final display mode is not greater than or equal to the blue character becomes the reach variation, that is, the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect. Become.

In some cases, the change icon and the hold icon before the change, which is the change icon, may or may not be executed even if the final display mode is the blue character or more. In this way, if the final display mode is blue character or higher, it will not be blue character or higher, or if the final display mode is green character or red character or higher, it will not be green character or red character or higher. It is also possible to make it easier or harder to execute the stop suggestion effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, when a character of blue character or higher is set as a specific change display mode, the display mode of the variable icon (execution information) or the hold icon before one change that becomes the variable icon ( The execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs depending on whether the display mode of the pending information displayed and erased at the start of the variable display of the plurality of symbols is the specific change display mode and the display mode is not the specific change display mode. Is a feature.

[Execution count of look-ahead effect and stop suggestion effect]
First, using the execution / non-execution determination table of the pre-effect shown in FIG. 124 (1), it is determined that the pre-effect is executed at the illustrated execution rate for each effect content based on the effect content obtained as a result of the prior determination. For example, the execution rate of the pre-production is 2% for no reach loss, 10% for normal reach loss, 20% for SP reach loss, and so on.

Next, when it is decided to execute the pre-effect, the presence / absence of reach of the effect content obtained as a result of the pre-judgment and the number of holdings at the time of the pre-judgment are used by using the pre-effect execution count determination table shown in FIG. The number of executions of the pre-effect is determined based on (the number of first special symbol reservations in the "low probability non-time saving game state" and the number of second special symbol reservations in the "high probability short time game state"). For example, when one time is decided, the pre-effect is executed by one change before the change which is the target of the decision, and when any of 2 to 4 times is decided, the target of the decision is made. The pre-effect is executed by any of two or four consecutive fluctuations before the fluctuation. If the number of 1st special symbol hold is 2 in the "low probability non-time saving game state" and a pre-judgment is made by entering the game ball into the 1st start opening 14, the hold at the time of the pre-judgment is made. The number is 3 (= 2 + 1) in which the number of reserved first special symbols is increased by 1.

The pre-effect is performed by displaying or sounding at least one of the effect symbol and the other image at the start or end of the variable effect so that the display or sound is a display or sound that is not normally performed. As a pre-effect at the start of the variable effect, the effect symbols of multiple examples start the variable display in a pattern different from the usual pattern, or as a pre-effect at the end of the variable effect, the effect symbols of the plurality of examples are the above-mentioned chance eyes. It can be used as a production to stop the book.

Then, when compared with the table shown in FIG. 107 and the time chart shown in FIG. 112, when the effect symbols in a plurality of columns are variablely displayed, once before the start of the variable display of the effect symbols of the plurality of examples ( Or, when the pre-effect is executed in the variable display of 1 to 2 times), the stop suggestion effect may or may not be executed, and 2 before the start of the variable display of the effect symbols of the plurality of examples. When the pre-effect is executed with the variable display of ~ 3 times (or 3 to 4 times), the stop suggestion effect is always executed.

In some cases, the stop suggestion effect is also executed even when the pre-effect is executed by the variation display 2 to 3 times (or 3 to 4 times) before the start of the variation display of the effect symbols of the plurality of examples. When the pre-effect is executed 2-3 times (or 3-4 times) before the start of the variation display of the effect symbols of the plurality of examples, there are times when the effect is not executed. Make it easier or harder to execute the stop suggestion effect than when the pre-effect is executed in one (or one or two times) variation display before the start of the variation display of the effect symbols of the plurality of examples. It is also possible.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, if 1 time (or 1 to 2 times) is the first number and 2 to 3 times (or 3 to 4 times) is the second number, one or a plurality of consecutive games. Stop in the variation display depending on whether the pre-effect is executed in the first variation display of the variation display of the times and the pre-effect is executed in the second variation display that is larger than the first variation display. The feature is that the execution rate of the suggestion effect is different.

[Types of reach production and stop suggestion production]
When the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 122 is adopted, according to the table, when the reach fluctuates, the stop suggestion effect is executed in all of them (FIG. 107), but the "normal reach" is executed. After that, it is not executed, and is executed after "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" are executed.

In some cases, even after the "normal reach" is executed according to other factors (contents of the effect in the change, effect mode, game state, etc.), other elements (contents of the effect in the change). , Production mode, game state, etc.), there are times when the stop suggestion effect is not executed and times when it is executed, and "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" are executed. After that, "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" are executed by setting the stop suggestion effect to be not executed and sometimes to be executed according to the other elements described above. After that, it is possible to make it easier or harder to execute the stop suggestion effect than after the "SP reach" is executed.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, for example, if "normal reach" is the first reach effect and "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" are the second reach effects, a plurality of reach effects Of these, the feature is that the execution rate of the stop suggestion effect differs between after the first reach effect is executed and after the second reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first reach effect, is executed. Become.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, in the variable effect, before the plurality of effect symbols are finally stopped, they are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode, and then the final temporary stop mode is set as the stop mode. , It is difficult to know the end of the variable effect, especially when the next effect (variable effect, hit effect) is continuously performed after the end of the variable effect, the break between the continuous effects (the break between the continuous effects) by executing the stop suggestion effect. Boundaries) may be difficult to understand, and there is a problem that it hinders the moderation of game progress and the improvement of game entertainment. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, we came up with the following gaming machines.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state in a game machine capable of executing the special game. A first aspect (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and a second aspect (for example, displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect) after the first aspect is performed. A display control means for controlling the variable display by means of displaying three symbols together), and the display control means performs the second aspect with the first display (for example, in which the plurality of columns of symbols can be changed). A second display in which the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop) and a second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop) )), And the display can be controlled by, and in at least a part of the case of shifting from the first display to the second display, a suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second display (stop suggestion effect; for example). In the case where the display of the three symbols is temporarily changed) and the variation display is controlled from the first display to the second display, the symbols of the plurality of examples are at least the special in the plurality of examples. There are cases where the display results are displayed in a special mode (for example, hits and misses with reach) including a part of the display result, and cases where the display results are displayed in a predetermined mode different from the special mode (for example, misses without reach). , A game machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestion effect is different.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state in a gaming machine capable of executing the special game. A first aspect (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and a second aspect (for example, displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect) after the first aspect is performed. A display control means for controlling the variable display by means of displaying three symbols together), and the display control means performs the second aspect with the first display (for example, in which the plurality of columns of symbols can be changed). A second display in which the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop) and a second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop) )), And the display can be controlled by, and in at least a part of the case of shifting from the first display to the second display, a suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second display (stop suggestion effect; for example). The display of the three symbols is temporarily changed), and the execution rate of the suggestion effect differs depending on whether the special game is determined to be executed or not executed by the determination. A gaming machine characterized by that.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game), a variation mode is determined based on the result of the determination, and the determined variation mode is determined. When the variable display of a plurality of columns of symbols is performed according to the above and the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), in a gaming machine capable of executing the special game, the above-mentioned A first aspect (for example, displaying with high-speed fluctuation) in which a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state, and after the first aspect is performed, the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in each row from the first aspect. A second aspect (for example, three symbols are displayed together) and a display control means for controlling the variation display are provided, and the display control means displays the second aspect in the same manner. A first display in which the symbols in a plurality of rows can be changed (for example, three symbols are displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop)) and a second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, three symbols are displayed). The display can be controlled by displaying the symbols in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop)), and in at least a part of the transition from the first display to the second display, the second display is displayed. When a suggestion effect (stop suggestion effect; for example, the display of three symbols is temporarily changed) that suggests a transition can be executed, and the variable display of the plurality of columns of symbols executes the special game in the determination. The first variation mode is different from the first variation mode (for example, the hit variation pattern and the reach loss variation pattern) including the variation mode determined when the determination is made. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestion effect is different depending on the variation mode (for example, the loss variation pattern without reach).

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game, the first gaming state (for example, the low probability non-time saving gaming state) is established. A game state control means capable of controlling a game in any of the second game states (for example, a high-accuracy time-short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the plurality of rows of symbols are transparently or visually recognized. A first aspect of displaying in a difficult state (for example, displaying with high-speed fluctuation) and a first aspect of displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect after the first aspect is performed. The display control means is provided with two modes (for example, three symbols are displayed together) and a display control means for controlling the variation display, and the display control means can change the second aspect by changing the symbols in the plurality of rows. The first display (for example, three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop)) and the second display (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state) so that the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed. (Main stop, fixed stop)), and the display can be controlled by, and suggestive effect suggesting that the second display is shifted to at least in a part of the case where the first display is shifted to the second display. (Stop suggestion effect; for example, the display of three symbols is temporarily changed) can be executed, and is controlled in the first game state and in the second game state by the game state control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not the machine is used.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state in a gaming machine capable of executing the special game. A first aspect (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and a second aspect (for example, displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect) after the first aspect is performed. A display control means for controlling the variable display by means of displaying three symbols together), and the display control means performs the second aspect with the first display (for example, in which the plurality of columns of symbols can be changed). A second display in which the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop) and a second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop) )), And the display can be controlled by, and in at least a part of the case of shifting from the first display to the second display, a suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second display (stop suggestion effect; for example). The display control means is provided with a pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is performed. , Based on the result of the pre-determination, the symbols in the plurality of rows are expected to execute the special game in the second aspect (suggesting the possibility of executing the special game) (for example, a chance eye). ), And in the case of controlling the variation display from the first display to the second display, the case where the symbols of the plurality of examples are displayed in the special mode and the case where the special mode is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestion effect is different depending on whether it is displayed in a different normal mode.

◆ When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is displayed according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the game machine capable of executing the special game is in a state where it is difficult to see through or visually recognize the symbols in the plurality of rows. The first aspect to be displayed in (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and the second aspect in which the symbols in the plurality of rows are displayed in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect after the first aspect is performed. (For example, three symbols are displayed together), and the display control means for controlling the variable display is provided, and the display control means performs the second aspect with the first display in which the plurality of rows of symbols can be changed. (For example, three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop)) and a second display (for example, three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state) so that the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (main stop). , Confirmed stop)), and the display can be controlled by, and in at least a part of the case of shifting from the first display to the second display, a suggestion effect (stop suggestion) suggesting the transition to the second display. The effect; for example, the display of three symbols is temporarily changed) can be executed, and the storage means for storing the determination information as the right of the determination and the determination information stored in the storage means are used as the basis for the determination information. Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made, execution information (the variation icon) corresponding to the determination information in which the symbols in the plurality of columns are variable and displayed, or The special game is executed by changing the information display means for displaying the hold information (hold icon) corresponding to the determination information stored in the storage means and the execution information or the display mode of the hold information. The display control means is provided with a display mode changing means that suggests the possibility of the display mode, and the display control means specifies a display mode of the execution information or a display mode of the reserved information that is erased at the start of variable display of the symbols of the plurality of examples. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the suggestion effect differs depending on whether the change display mode (for example, blue character or higher) is used or not the specific change display mode.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state in a gaming machine capable of executing the special game. A first aspect (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and a second aspect (for example, displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect) after the first aspect is performed. A display control means for controlling the variable display by means of displaying three symbols together), and the display control means performs the second aspect with the first display (for example, in which the plurality of columns of symbols can be changed). A second display in which the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop) and a second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop) )), And the display can be controlled by, and in at least a part of the case of shifting from the first display to the second display, a suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the second display (stop suggestion effect; for example). The display of the three symbols is temporarily changed), and the pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made is provided, and the pre-determination Based on the result, a pre-effect (for example, at the start of the variation effect) is performed in one or a plurality of variation displays performed by satisfying one or a plurality of consecutive start conditions before the start of the variation display of the plurality of symbols. Pre-effect, variation The pre-effect at the end of the effect (displaying the chance of the symbol)) can be executed, and the first (for example, 1 (or 1 or 2)) variation of the 1 or multiple times is possible. When the pre-effect is executed in the display and when the pre-effect is executed in the variation display of the second number of times (for example, 2 to 3 times (or 3 to 4 times)) which is larger than the first number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rates of the suggestion effects in the variable display of the symbols of the plurality of examples are different.

◆ Based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result (for example, a hit), the plurality of rows of symbols are displayed in a transparent or difficult-to-see state in a gaming machine capable of executing the special game. A first aspect (for example, displayed by high-speed fluctuation) and a second aspect (for example, displaying the symbols in the plurality of rows in each row in a state that is easier to see than the first aspect) after the first aspect is performed. (Displaying all three symbols together), the display control means for controlling the variation display, and the special case between the start of the variation and the stop of the plurality of columns according to the result of the determination. The display control means includes the effect control means capable of executing any of a plurality of reach effects suggesting that the game may be executed, and the display control means performs the second aspect in the plurality of rows. The first display in which the symbols can be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned and displayed in a swinging state (temporary stop)) and the second display in which the symbols in the plurality of rows cannot be changed (for example, the three symbols are aligned). The display can be controlled by displaying in a stationary state (main stop, fixed stop)), and the transition to the second display is performed in at least a part of the transition from the first display to the second display. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (stop suggestion effect; for example, the display of three symbols is temporarily changed), and the first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect) among the plurality of reach effects is executed. The feature is that the execution rate of the suggestion effect is different between after and after the second reach effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach), which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first reach effect, is executed. A game machine.

In the effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 107, 118, and 122, the stop suggestion effect is not executed in the normal variation and the shortened variation, which are the loss without reach (normal loss), but FIGS. 107, 118, and 122. Instead of the table shown in FIG. 125, the effect content determination table shown in FIG. 125 is adopted so that the stop suggestion effect is executed in the normal fluctuation and the shortened fluctuation that result in the loss without reach (normal loss). Follow the comparison of each execution rate of the stop suggestion effect shown in each of the temporary stop mode and stop suggestion effect], [hit / fail judgment and stop suggestion effect], [variation pattern and stop suggestion effect], and [game state and stop suggestion effect]. Can be done.

Next, the display mode of the effect mode set according to the gaming state and the display mode of the effect symbols in a plurality of rows in the variable effect in the set effect mode will be described in more detail.
As shown in FIG. 126 (1), in the normal mode, stages 1 to 3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of stage effects having different production modes, and the stages 1 to 3 produce a background image displayed on the image display device 31. The aspect is different. For example, a background image with a spring motif is displayed on stage 1, a background image with a summer motif is displayed on stage 2, and a background image with a winter motif is displayed on stage 3, respectively.

In the normal mode, for example, every time a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 50 times) is reached, the stages are set to be switched in a certain order. For example, stage 1 ⇒ stage 2 ⇒ stage 3 ⇒ stage 1 ... The stage is switched according to the switching order of repeating. Further, as a predetermined switching condition, for example, the normal stage may be switched from the next variable effect according to the stage switching order triggered by the reach loss, or the stage switching order may be triggered by the operation of the effect button 35 by the player. The stage may be switched according to the above.

The display mode of the effect symbols executed in each of the plurality of stages 1 to 3 is different. The effect symbols are an identification unit consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9", and an identification unit, depending on the type of stage corresponding to the game state. It may be composed of a decorative portion composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as a character image or a decorative frame image accompanying the surrounding (neighborhood), or may be composed of only an identification portion.

Specifically, the display mode of the effect symbol at the time of stage 1 is the identification unit of the numbers "1" to "9" and the animal character image (hereinafter, animal character) displayed corresponding to each number. For example, it is composed of decoration parts for "dogs, cats, tigers, etc." The display mode of the effect pattern at the time of stage 2 is composed of an identification unit of "1" to "9" and a decoration unit of a character image related to a predetermined motif. The display mode of the effect symbol at the stage 3 is composed of only the identification portions of "1" to "9". In this way, in the normal mode, the stage 1 and 2 display the highly decorative design of the combination of the identification unit and the decorative unit, and the stage 3 displays the design of the design consisting of only the identification unit. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 126 (2), in the probability variation mode, RUSH1 and RUSH2 are prepared in advance as a plurality of stage effects having different effect modes, and a background image displayed on the image display device 31 according to the type of RUSH to be executed. The production mode of is different. For example, RUSH1 displays a background image with a sea motif, and RUSH2 displays a background image with a mountain motif.

Further, in the probability variation mode, the display mode of the effect symbol differs depending on the type of RUSH. The display mode of the effect pattern in RUSH 1 is composed of an identification unit of numbers "1" to "9" and a decorative unit of a decorative frame image displayed corresponding to each number. The display mode of the effect symbol in RUSH2 is composed of only the identification portions of "1" to "9". The effect design is displayed in a more decorative design display mode in the normal mode than in the probabilistic mode.
The normal mode is set to the first or second mode and the probability variation mode is set to the second or first mode, or the stage 1 in the normal mode is set to the first mode and the stage 2 or 3 is set to the second mode. , RUSH1 in the probability variation mode is set as the first mode, and RUSH2 is set as the second mode.

● Next, the suggestive effect performed by the variable effect will be explained in more detail.
In the variable effect, a plurality of rows of effect symbols can be variablely displayed in either a variable display mode (first mode) that is difficult to see and a stop display mode (second mode) that is easier to see than the variable display mode. After the multiple rows of effect symbols are variedly displayed in the variable display mode, the plurality of rows of effect symbols are variablely displayed in the stop display mode, and the plurality of rows of effect symbols are variablely displayed in the stop display mode. Can be changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state.

The variable display mode (first mode) in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect symbols in the plurality of rows includes that the effect symbols in the plurality of rows are in a transparent state.
In the changeable display state, it seems that the multi-row effect symbols are stopped and displayed, but in reality, the multi-row effect symbols in the stop display mode are slightly moved (displayed in a variable manner) and the symbol changes continue. It is a stop display state (second aspect) indicating that the state is displayed.
As a changeable display state, a stop display state in which multiple rows of effect symbols are aligned and swaying up and down or left and right is displayed in a variable manner, and a multi-row effect symbol is variablely displayed in a reach temporary stop display state. There is a stop display state and a variable display state due to a small symbol (corresponding to the special symbol TZ in FIG. 128).
On the other hand, the fixed stop display state is a stop display state (second mode) indicating that the symbol variation is completed and confirmed when the effect symbols in a plurality of rows do not move slightly (non-variable display state).

In the variable effect, when the effect symbols in a plurality of columns are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, at least a part of the effect symbols in the plurality of columns is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state (transition). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (predetermined effect) that can suggest that. The suggestion effect also includes the stop suggestion effect described above.

FIG. 127 (1) shows the type (type) of the suggestion effect.
As shown in FIG. 127 (1), the suggestion effect includes a plurality of suggestion effects such as a display suggestion effect, a character suggestion effect, and a voice suggestion effect. In the variable effect, one or more of the display suggestion effect, the character suggestion effect, and the voice suggestion effect can be executed until the effect symbols in a plurality of rows change from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state.

The display suggestion effect includes an image suggestion effect performed by the display unit of the image display device 70, and a lamp suggestion effect performed by the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 and the decorative lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 76. .. It is possible to suggest that the effect symbols of the plurality of examples of the stop display mode are shifted from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state by these image displays and lamp displays.

The image suggestion effect includes a pattern suggestion effect and a scene change effect.
The symbol suggestion effect can suggest that the effect symbols in a plurality of rows change from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol.
As the stop display mode of the effect symbol, there are a display by a decorative unit and an identification unit, a display mainly of an identification unit (number), a symbol shape, a symbol display size, a symbol array display, and the like.

Specifically, a change operation or a change display is performed in which the display mode of the effect symbol 70a displayed on the display unit of the image display device 70 changes, and either the entire effect symbol or the decorative unit or the identification unit of the effect symbols is performed. Enlarges, reduces, or rotates once, the entire production symbol, any of the decoration and identification parts of the production design emits light, the entire production design, and any of the decoration and identification parts of the production design The effects (flame effect, flash effect, etc.) are linked to the light emission, the display size of multiple production symbols is different, the multiple rows of production symbols are displayed in an array in a state where they overlap each other, and the multiple rows of production symbols are displayed. A design suggestion effect is performed, such as displaying the images in an array without overlapping each other.

The scene change effect is an eye-catching display that catches the player's line of sight and draws attention in a form that temporarily changes the scene to a display mode different from the stop display mode of the multi-row effect symbols. It is possible to suggest that the changeable display state is changed to the fixed stop display state.

Specifically, it is an opening / closing member shaped like a fold or a shutter, which displays a character image related to a predetermined motif on the display unit of the image display device 70, displays a logo mark image indicating the title of the gaming machine 1. A production video that can be opened after the entire display is closed, a production video that displays the number of prize balls won by the player, a production video in which a character related to a predetermined motif appears and emits dialogue, and a production video that shows the type of jackpot game. , Displaying an effect image or flash image of a predetermined color, shape and size on the entire display unit, blacking out or whitening out the entire display unit, light emission display of the light guide plate, and other scene change effects are performed. ..

The lamp suggestion effect is a display state in which a plurality of rows of effect symbols can be changed by lighting / blinking display of the decorative lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 and the decorative lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 76. It is possible to suggest that the fixed stop display state is set from.
Specifically, the decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are lit / blinked for a predetermined time in a predetermined lighting / blinking pattern, but are lit / blinked for a predetermined time in a predetermined lighting / blinking pattern. Lamp suggestion effects such as LED lighting are performed.
In addition, the image suggestion effect includes an effect in which an effect (flame effect, flash effect, etc.) is emitted around the effect pattern, and an effect in which the effect or flash is emitted in a predetermined direction on the display unit.

The accessory suggestion effect suggests that the effect operation of the first movable member 73, the second movable member, and the effect button 17 causes the effect symbols in a plurality of rows to change from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state. It is possible.
Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 40a and appears on the front side of the display unit of the image display device 70, and the second movable member 74 moves up and down on the left side of the effect space 40a. The effect suggestion effect is performed by the effect action of changing the effect button 17 to a first state in which the effect button 17 is positioned at a predetermined operation position and a second state in which the effect button 17 is positioned at a movement position moved from the predetermined operation position. In addition, the lamp suggestion effect by the lamps (LEDs) provided on the movable members 73, 74 and the effect button 17 may be included in the accessory suggestion effect.
The voice suggestion effect can suggest that the effect symbols in a plurality of rows change from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state by the sound output from the voice output device 9 (speaker).
Specifically, voice suggestion production by SE (sound effect) such as music (BGM), sound effect and dialogue is performed.

In one variation effect, depending on the type of variation effect pattern to be executed, one or one suggestion effect of a common type (type) from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state of the effect symbols in a plurality of columns. There are times when suggestion effects of different types (types) are executed, and times when they are executed multiple times.
As shown in FIG. 127 (1), in the suggestion effect, the display suggestion effect, the character suggestion effect, and the voice suggestion effect are different types (types) of the suggestion effect, and the image suggestion effect of the display suggestion effect (design suggestion effect, The scene change effect) and the lamp suggestion effect are the same type of suggestion effect. The image suggestion effect and the lamp suggestion effect are different types of effects in that the image and the lamp have different display modes, but they "display" each other.

For example, if two symbol suggestion effects and one scene change effect are executed in one variable effect, the common type of suggestion effect is executed three times. Further, for example, when the character suggestion effect by the effect operation of the first movable member 73 and the character suggestion effect by the effect operation by the effect button 17 are executed in one variable effect, the common type of suggestion effect is 2 It has been executed twice. Further, for example, when a symbol suggestion effect in which the effect symbol is enlarged in one variable effect, a symbol suggestion effect in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined size, and a scene change effect by displaying a character image are executed, respectively. This means that the common type of suggestion effect was executed three times.

Further, when the common type of suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times, the display modes (effect operation, lamp light emission mode, audio content) of the plurality of common suggestion effects are different.
For example, even if the symbol suggestion effect is performed twice in one variation effect, the suggestion effect of the display mode in which the symbol is enlarged is performed in the first symbol suggestion effect, and the symbol is reduced in the second symbol suggestion effect. The display mode is different even for the common type of suggestive effect so that the suggestive effect of the display mode is performed.
To
Further, for example, even if the scene change effect is performed twice in one variable effect, the suggestion effect by the character image display is performed in the first scene change effect, and the suggestion by the flash image display is performed in the second scene change effect. The display mode of the common type of suggestion effect is different as it is performed in the effect.
In addition, even if the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect are performed once in each variable effect, the symbol image suggestion effect is performed in the symbol suggestion effect, and the logo image is displayed in the scene change effect. Even if the suggestion effect is a common type so that the suggestion effect is performed, the display mode is different.

On the other hand, for example, when the symbol suggestion effect and the character suggestion effect are executed in one variable effect, different types of suggestion effects are executed. Further, for example, when the scene change effect and the voice suggestion effect are executed in parallel in one variable effect, different types of suggestion effects are executed.

Further, the number of executions of the common type of suggestion effect executed in one variation effect differs depending on the set effect mode and the type of the variation effect pattern to be executed.
For example, in the normal mode, when the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the SPSP reach loss corresponding to the variation pattern 10 shown in FIG. 125 is executed, the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the SPSP reach loss corresponding to the variation pattern 8 is executed. , The number of executions of the common type of suggestion effect is large. This is because the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 10 is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 8.

In addition, in one variable effect, depending on the type of effect mode that has been set, a type that is common to all effect modes from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state. There are times when the suggestion effect of is executed one or more times, and there are times when a kind of suggestion effect that is executed only in one effect mode is executed.

For example, in one variable effect, a scene change effect by displaying a logo image is executed in both the normal mode and the probabilistic mode, and only in the probabilistic mode (or the normal mode) of the normal mode and the probabilistic mode. Suggestion production is executed.

FIG. 127 (2) shows the types of image suggestion effects that can be executed in association with each of the plurality of variable effect patterns executed in the set effect mode.
As shown in FIG. 127 (2), the image suggestion effect can be executed regardless of whether the variation effect pattern of loss or jackpot is performed in the normal mode and the probability variation mode. Although not shown, the lamp suggestion effect, the character suggestion effect, and the voice suggestion effect can be executed regardless of whether the variation effect pattern of loss or jackpot is performed.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the normal loss is executed in the normal mode, the effect suggestive effect when the effect symbols in multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state in the combination display mode showing the normal loss. Is executed.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the normal reach loss is executed in the normal mode, the symbol suggestion effect is displayed when the effect symbols in multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state in the combination display mode indicating the reach loss. Will be executed.

Regarding the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect in the variation effect related to the fluctuation effect pattern of normal loss and the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of normal reach loss, the symbol suggestion effect of the same display mode is executed regardless of the type of stage. Alternatively, the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect may be different for each type of stage, or the execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects having different display modes may be different for each type of stage.

For example, when either the symbol suggestion effect 1 (for example, symbol enlargement) or the symbol suggestion effect 2 (for example, symbol emission) is performed in each stage, the symbol suggestion effect 2 is performed in the stages 1 and 2 rather than the symbol suggestion effect 2. The ratio of the effect 1 being executed may be higher, and the ratio of the symbol suggestion effect 2 being executed may be higher than that of the symbol suggestion effect 1 in the stage 3.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss or SPSP reach loss is executed in the normal mode, the symbols in the multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state in the combination display mode indicating the reach loss. The suggestion effect and the scene change effect are executed, that is, the suggestion effect of the common type is executed a plurality of times regardless of the type of the stage.

Regarding the types of display modes of the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect, the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect of the same display mode may be executed regardless of the stage type, or the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect may be executed for each stage type. The display mode of each of the effect and the scene change effect may be different, or the execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects and the execution ratio of each of the plurality of scene change effects may be different for each stage type. ..

For example, when either the scene change effect 1 (for example, character image display) or the scene change effect 2 (for example, logo image display) is performed in each stage, the stage 1 and 2 are more than the scene change effect 2. The scene change effect 1 may be executed at a higher rate, and the scene change effect 2 may be executed at a higher rate than the scene change effect 1 in the stage 3.

In this way, when the fluctuation effect pattern of normal loss or normal reach loss is executed in the normal mode, the pattern suggestion effect is performed as the image suggestion effect, but the scene change effect is not performed, and the SP / SPSP reach loss is performed. When the variation effect pattern of is executed, the pattern suggestion effect and the scene change effect are performed as the image suggestion effect. That is, in the normal mode, the scene change effect is more likely to be executed when the variation effect related to the SP / SPSP reach loss variation pattern is executed than when the variation effect related to the normal loss variation pattern is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation effect pattern of normal loss is executed in the normal mode, the scene change effect may be performed.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the normal loss is executed in the probability variation mode, the symbol suggestion effect is displayed when the effect symbols in multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display in the combination display mode showing the normal loss. Will be executed.
Regarding the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect, the symbol suggestion effect having the same display mode may be executed regardless of the type of RUSH, or the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect may be different for each type of RUSH. The execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects may be different for each type of RUSH.

Regarding the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect, the symbol suggestion effect having the same display mode may be executed regardless of the type of RUSH, or the display mode of the symbol suggestion effect may be different for each type of RUSH. The execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects may be different for each type of RUSH.

For example, when either the symbol suggestion effect 3 (for example, symbol rotation) or the symbol suggestion effect 4 (for example, the effect is applied to the symbol) is performed in each RUSH, the symbol suggestion effect 4 in RUSH 1 is more than the symbol suggestion effect 4. The rate of execution of the effect 3 is higher, and the rate of execution of the symbol suggestion effect 4 may be higher than that of the symbol suggestion effect 3 in RUSH 2.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the normal reach loss is executed in the probability variation mode, the effect suggestion effect or the scene when the effect symbols in multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display in the combination display mode indicating the reach loss. A conversion effect is performed. In RUSH1, a scene change effect is executed, and in RUSH2, a symbol suggestion effect is executed. That is, although a common type of suggestion effect is executed regardless of the type of RUSH, the display mode of the suggestion effect differs depending on the type of RUSH.

When the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss or SPSP reach loss is executed in the probability variation mode, the symbol is suggested when the effect symbols in multiple rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display in the combination display mode indicating the reach loss. The production and the scene change production are executed.

Regarding the types of display modes of the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect, the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect of the same display mode may be executed regardless of the type of RUSH, or the symbol suggestion for each type of RUSH. The display mode of the effect and the scene change effect may be different, or the execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects and the execution ratio of each of the plurality of scene change effects may be different for each type of RUSH.

For example, when any of scene change effect 1 (for example, character image display), scene change effect 2 (for example, logo image display) and scene change 3 (for example, effect display) is performed in each RUSH, RUSH1 In RUSH2, the rate of execution of scene change effect 1 is higher than that of scene change effects 2 and 3, and in RUSH2, the rate of execution of scene change effect 3 is higher than that of scene change effects 1 and 2. May be good.

In this way, in the probabilistic mode, normal loss or normal reach loss (RUSH)
When the variation effect pattern of (1) is executed, the pattern suggestion effect is performed as the image suggestion effect, but the scene change effect is not performed, and the SP / SPSP reach loss variation effect pattern is executed. In that case, a design suggestion effect and a scene change effect are performed as the image suggestion effect. That is, in the probability variation mode, the scene change effect is more likely to be executed when the variation effect related to the SP / SPSP reach loss variation pattern is executed than when the variation effect related to the normal loss variation pattern is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation effect pattern of normal loss is executed in the normal mode, the scene change effect may be performed.

In both the normal mode and the probability variation mode, when the variation effect of the jackpot variation effect pattern is executed, the effect symbols in a plurality of columns are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state of the combination display mode indicating the jackpot. A design suggestion effect and a scene change effect are executed.

In the case of a gaming machine with settings, for example, when a combination of jackpot winning probabilities is installed in three stages (setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/275, setting 3: 1/250), a scene. In the case of conversion 1 (for example, character image display), the execution rate is high at setting 3, and in the case of scene conversion 2 (for example, logo image display), the execution rate is high at setting 1. It is possible to guess the setting accordingly.

Although not shown, the set effect mode (or stage (type of RUSH) and variable effect pattern) are also set for the lamp suggestion effect, the character suggestion effect, and the voice suggestion effect, as in the above image suggestion effect. The execution rate is different depending on the type of.

Regarding the display modes of the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect, the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect of the same display mode may be executed regardless of the type of the stage / RUSH, respectively, or for each type of stage / RUSH. The display mode of the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect may be different, or the execution ratio of each of the plurality of symbol suggestion effects and the execution ratio of each of the plurality of scene change effects may be different for each type of stage / RUSH. May be good.

When the variation effect of the jackpot variation effect pattern is executed, the accessory suggestion effect may be executed when the effect symbols in a plurality of columns are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display in the combination display mode indicating the jackpot. is there.

When the jackpot symbol in the combination display mode indicating the jackpot in the changeable display mode is displayed as a fixed stop, the jackpot 50 with an open pattern corresponding to the jackpot symbol (any of the jackpot symbols A to C) displayed as the fixed stop. Perform a jackpot game to open. The jackpot game is composed of an opening game, a plurality of round games (long-open round game or short-open round game), and an ending game.

When the jackpot symbol A is displayed as a fixed stop, a jackpot game (second special game) having a higher degree of advantage than the jackpot game (first special game) by the jackpot symbols B and C is performed. The jackpot game with a high degree of advantage is a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be obtained by winning a game ball in the jackpot 50, and when the jackpot symbol A is displayed as a fixed stop, the degree of advantage is higher than that of the jackpot symbol B. The period during which the high jackpot game is continued is set for a long time.

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol A is displayed as a fixed stop, a long open round game of 10R (“R” means a round) is performed, and when the jackpot symbol B is displayed as a fixed stop, a long opening of 5R is performed. A round game is played. In the long open round game, the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed depending on the number of rounds to be executed, and in each round game, after the opening of the large winning opening 50 is started, for example, 10 game balls are awarded to the large winning opening 50. And, for example, when any of the round end conditions for which the specified opening time of 29.5 seconds elapses is satisfied, the large winning opening 50 is closed.

When the jackpot symbol C is displayed as a fixed stop, a 2R short open round game is performed. The short open round game is a round game in which it is difficult to win a game ball in the large winning opening 50 because the specified opening time of the large winning opening 50 is extremely short as compared with the long opening round game. Therefore, in the short open round game, since the game ball hardly wins in the large winning opening 50, the actual number of rounds in which the prize ball can be obtained is "0" R.

As shown in FIG. 127 (3), when the effect symbols in a plurality of rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state in the combination display mode showing the jackpot symbol A or B, it is possible to execute the accessory suggestion effect. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (3), when the effect symbols in a plurality of rows are changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state in the combination display mode showing the jackpot symbols A and B, the accessory suggestion effect (movable). As for the effect operation by the members 73 and 74 and the effect operation of the effect button 17), it is easier to execute the character suggestion effect when the normal mode is set than when the probability variation mode is set.

In the probabilistic game state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than in the normal game state, and the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 47. Therefore, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed one after another, the next jackpot is won in a relatively short time, and the ratio of the jackpot symbol A being selected is higher than that of the jackpot symbols B and C. Even if the suggestion effect is performed, the player's feeling of exhilaration is not so high. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot winning probability is lower than in the probability variation gaming state, and when the jackpot is won (so-called first hit), the ratio of selecting the jackpot symbol A is lower than that of the jackpot symbols B and C. By executing the character suggestion effect in the mode, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player will win the jackpot symbol A. It should be noted that the character suggestion effect is not executed when the jackpot symbol C is displayed as a fixed stop, or the execution rate (%) is extremely low in either the normal mode or the probability variation mode (for example, the execution rate: 1%). ).

FIG. 128 shows a display mode of a variation effect pattern of normal loss executed in stage 1 of the normal mode corresponding to the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 128 (1), four first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the second hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D. , With the hold number "4" displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the hold number "0" displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, the combination display in which the three effect symbols 70a indicate normal loss. In the embodiment "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)", the fixed stop display is displayed for a predetermined time, and the special symbol TZ (small symbol) is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "216" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 38. There is.

The symbol confirmation period in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a fixed stop is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern to be executed and the determination result of the jackpot.
The variable display (changeable display state) of the special symbol TZ (small symbol) is continuously performed in a certain display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display, and is performed on the display unit. At a position (for example, the end of the display unit of the image display device 70) that is considered to be easily visible even when the movable members 73 and 74 (effects) are produced on the front side. Is displayed. In a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the movable members 73 and 74 are not shielded by the effect operation and are always displayed in a visually recognizable state.

In addition, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 70E and 70F can be visually recognized even if the movable members 73 and 74 (effects) are produced, as in the case of the special symbol TZ. It is displayed at a position considered to be easy to hold (for example, the end of the display unit of the image display device 70). In a more preferable mode, it is preferable that the display is always visible without being shielded by the effect operation of the effect object.

As shown in FIG. 128 (2), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, at least a part of the three effect symbols 70a performs a predetermined operation, and the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The fluctuation start suggestion effect HS suggesting that the start is started is performed. As the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, for example, the face of "dog, cat, tiger" in the decorative part 70a1 of the three effect patterns 70a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as confirmed stop is enlarged. At the same time, the variation start operation in which the eyes of the "dog, cat, tiger" are changed is performed, and the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is performed by a display mode different from the display mode of the effect symbol 70a that has been confirmed and stopped. It is suggested that it will be started.

In the normal mode, the variation start suggestion effect HS may be different for each stage type. For example, in the stage 2 of the normal mode, the character of the decorative portion 70a1 of the effect symbol 70a performs an operation of shaking the head vertically or horizontally, and in the stage 3 of the normal mode, an operation of changing the display color of the numbers of the effect symbol 70a is performed. To do so.
Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol by performing the variation start suggestion effect HS, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the next symbol variation display will be started after the symbol determination is stopped. It becomes.

Further, with the start of the change start suggestion effect HS, the first hold icon H11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shifts to the change icon display area 70C, and the change icon display area 70C is covered. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "4" to "3". In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Although the variable display mode of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot.

As shown in FIG. 128 (3), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 70a is performed for a predetermined time, (4) when the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left area. The identification unit 70a2 "2" is momentarily enlarged to perform a symbol change operation that changes to a display mode that is emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. (5) The effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (6), when the effect symbol 70a of “5 (koala)” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right area, the identification unit 70a2 “5” is momentarily enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative unit 70a1. (7) The effect symbol 70 of "5 (koala)" is put into a temporary stop display state (changeable display state) by performing a symbol change operation that changes to the display mode to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (8), when the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central region, the identification portion 70a2 “4” is momentarily enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. The symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS) is performed by the symbol change operation that changes to the display mode. (9) The combination display mode "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (9) in which the three effect symbols 70a show normal loss. "Koala)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "245" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. For the special symbol TZ, the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS) is not performed and the display is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 128 (10), after the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the decoration of the three production symbols 70a of "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" displayed as a confirmation stop is displayed. The face of the "dog, chicken, koala" in part 70a1 is enlarged, and the fluctuation start operation (variation start suggestion effect HS) in which the eyes of the "dog, chicken, koala" change is performed, and the effect symbol 70a changes. The display starts.

In this way, in the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of normal loss (no loss of reach), when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop) by the symbol change operation of the central effect symbol 38. Since it is suggested that the suggestion effect TS) is performed and the fixed stop display is performed in the combination display mode showing the normal loss, the change effect does not develop into reach or the like by the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS). It can be surely recognized that it will end.

Further, in the variation effect related to the variation pattern of the normal loss shown in FIG. 128, the three effect symbols 70a are the left effect symbol 70a → the right effect symbol 70a → the center effect symbol 70a according to the number of special symbol reservations. There are times when the temporary stop is displayed in order and times when the three effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time.
When the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the stop suggestion effect TS by the symbol change operation that changes the display mode in which the identification portion 70a2 of each effect symbol 70a is enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1 is performed. Three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop.

When the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the right effect symbol 70a → the left effect symbol 70a → the center effect symbol 70a, and when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time. The display mode of the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS) may be different.
For example, in the variation effect related to the variation pattern of normal loss, when the first special symbol hold number is "1" or "2", the three effect symbols 70a are the left effect symbol 70a → the right effect symbol 70a → the center. Temporary stop display is performed in the order of the effect symbol 70a, and as the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS), the animal character of the decoration unit 70a1 rotates and the number of the identification unit 70a2 expands. , When the number of 1st special symbol hold is "3" or "4", three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the number of the identification unit 70a2 is enlarged as the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS). The symbol change operation to be performed may be performed.

For example, when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the effect symbol 70a on the right side → the effect symbol 70a on the left side → the effect symbol 70a in the center, the identification portion 70a2 is enlarged and emphasized more than the decoration portion 70a1. When the symbol change operation that changes to the display mode is performed and the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the symbol change operation or the periphery of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect is applied to the identification unit 70a2, the decorative unit 70a1, or the entire effect symbol 70a. It is also possible to perform a changing operation in which the effect is emitted.

FIG. 129 shows a display mode of a variation effect pattern of reach loss / hit executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 129 (11), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 70a is performed for a predetermined time, (12) when the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left area. The identification unit 70a2 "2" is enlarged to perform a symbol change operation that changes to a display mode that is emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. (13) The effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is put into a temporary stop display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (14), when the effect symbol 70a of “2 (dog)” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right side region, the identification portion 70a2 “2” is enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. (15) The effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is put into the temporary stop display state, and the left and right effect symbols 70a are aligned with the same symbol "2 (dog)". It becomes a state (changeable display state).

As shown in FIG. 129 (16), when the reach state is reached, the left and right effect symbols 70a "2 (dog)" move in a direction away from the predetermined temporary stop display position shown in FIG. 129 (15). A movement effect ME is performed to change the temporary stop display position and the symbol display size while performing the above.
In the reach state, the left and right effect symbols 70a "2 (dog)" are temporarily stopped and displayed at the moving position moved from the predetermined temporary stop display position to the display area near the left and right outer edge ends of the display unit. After the movement effect ME, a normal reach effect is performed or it develops into either SP reach or SPSP reach. By performing the movement effect ME, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reach state has been established, and further, it is possible to expect that it may develop into either SP reach or SPSP reach. ..

FIG. 130 shows a display mode of a variation effect pattern of normal reach loss executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 130 (17), when the normal reach effect NE is performed without developing into SP reach / SP / SP reach after the movement effect ME shown in FIG. 129 (16), the decorative parts of the left and right effect symbols 70a. It is suggested that the normal reach effect is performed by the "dog" of 70a1 performing a changing motion of shaking the ear up and down. In the normal reach effect, the central effect symbol 70a is displayed at a low speed on the front side (or back side) of the left and right effect symbols 70a, and a flame effect that strongly appeals to the player's vision around the center effect symbol 70a. The EF is displayed by light emission, and a fanning effect is performed that makes it expected that the central effect symbol 70a is stopped at the same symbol as the left and right effect symbols 70a and may become a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 130 (18), it is suggested that when the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed, the center effect symbol 70a is lost in a highlighted state enlarged from the left and right effect symbols 70a. After that, (19) the left and right effect symbols 70a in the temporary stop display state perform a proximity operation of moving in a direction approaching each other from the moving position, and the central effect symbol 70a shrinks to the back side of the left and right effect symbols 70a. When the three effect symbols 70a "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position, (20) each effect symbol 70a is stopped by the light effect. When the suggestion effect TS (design suggestion effect) is performed, (21) "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" in the combination display mode indicating reach loss is displayed as a fixed stop, and a special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed in the same combination display mode of "232" as the identification unit 70a2 of the symbol 70a.
In the stop suggestion effect TS shown in FIG. 130 (20), the light effect is applied only to the decorative portion 70a1 of each effect symbol 70a, or the light effect is applied only to the identification unit 70a2 of each effect symbol 70a. Good.

As shown in FIG. 130 (22), after the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the decoration of the three production symbols 70a of "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" displayed as a confirmation stop is displayed. The face of the "dog, rabbit, dog" in part 70a1 is enlarged, and the fluctuation start operation in which the eyes of the "dog, rabbit, dog" are changed (variation start suggestion effect HS) is performed, and the special symbol TZ is changed. The display is started, and (23) high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 70a is performed.

FIG. 131 shows a display mode of a variation effect pattern of SP reach loss executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 131 (31), when developing into SP reach, a predetermined setting suggesting that the movement effect ME shown in FIG. 129 (16) is performed and then the process shifts to either SP reach or SPSP reach. The transition production SH is performed. In some cases, the SP reach may be entered after passing through the normal reach effect.

In the transition effect SH, the entire display unit is temporarily whitened (whiteout), so that the display of the effect symbol 70a becomes faint and disappears. By performing the transition effect SH, the player can recognize that the player has developed into either SP reach or SPSP reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (32), in the transition effect SH, the left and right effect symbols 70a in the temporarily stopped display state move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the display unit while rotating at the movement position, and the decoration unit. The effect of switching to the reach state (changeable display state) in which the 70a1 "dog" is erased and the reduced symbol ZG (effect symbol 70a) of only the identification unit 70a2 "2" is displayed is performed. Even during the transition effect SH, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F continue to be displayed in a visible state.

With the start of the transition effect SH, the hold icon (including the hold icon display area) being displayed is hidden. In this case, the hold icon (including the hold icon display areas 70B and 70D) is hidden even during the subsequent execution period of the SP / SPSP reach effect. By displaying only the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 70C) when the transition effect SH is being performed, the variable icon changes to the icon on the side with the highest expectation of winning the jackpot. , It is possible to expect that the SP / SPSP reach production, which has a high expectation of winning a big hit, will be executed. Even during the reach effect, the hold numbers displayed in the hold number display areas 70E and 70F continue to be displayed in a visible state.

As shown in FIG. 131 (33), the SP reach effect SE is performed after the transition effect SH. As the SP reach effect, for example, a mission effect is performed in which a character related to a predetermined motif searches for a treasure. (34) If a predetermined time elapses after the start of the mission production and the treasure is not found and fails, a failure production is performed in which the fact that the mission has failed is notified. In the central area of the above, a symbol suggestion effect (ZS) is performed in which the symbols of the identification unit 70a2 "3" enlarged by the reduced symbols ZG of the left and right "2" are displayed in the temporarily stopped display state, and the combination "reach loss" is shown. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that the effect symbol 70a in the display mode of "232" is displayed as a fixed stop.

After the display mode shown in FIG. 131 (35) is displayed for a predetermined minute time, the scene is temporarily changed to a display mode different from the display mode shown in FIG. 131 (35) as shown in FIG. 131 (36). A scene change effect BS is performed by an eye-catching display that catches the player's line of sight and draws attention. In the scene change effect BS, a character related to a predetermined motif is displayed, and a ring-shaped effect surrounding the character is emitted and displayed.

After the scene change effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 131 (37), from the display mode of only the identification unit 70a2 “232” shown in FIG. 131 (35), the effect symbol 70a includes the decorative unit 70a1 “2”. (Dog) 3 (Rabbit) 2 (Dog) ”is switched to the display state, and a temporary stop is displayed at a predetermined stop position (design suggestion effect ZS).

Further, when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed, the identification unit 38a "3" of the central effect symbol 70a is reduced to a display size smaller than the display size shown in FIG. 131 (35). That is, the occupied area occupied by the central effect symbol (number) 70a displayed after the scene change effect BS is performed is the central effect symbol (number) displayed before the scene change effect BS is performed. 70a is smaller than the occupied area occupied by the display unit.
Further, the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position without performing a proximity operation from the moving position shown in FIG. 129 (16).

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (38), the combination display mode “2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)” indicating the reach loss is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is the identification unit of the effect symbol 70a. The stop display is performed in the same combination display mode of "232" as 70a2. Immediately after the scene change effect, the combination display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" indicating the reach loss may be displayed as a definite stop.

After the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (39), the decoration of the three production symbols 70a of "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" displayed as the confirmation stop is displayed. The face of the "dog, rabbit, dog" in part 70a1 is enlarged, and the fluctuation start operation (variation start suggestion effect HS) in which the eyes of the "dog, rabbit, dog" are changed is performed, and the special symbol TZ is changed. The display is started, and (40) high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 38 is performed.

FIG. 132 shows a display mode different from the display mode of the scene change effect BT shown in FIG. 131.
In the scene change effect BT shown in FIG. 132 (36A), the display unit is blacked out. In this way, the display mode of the scene change effect BT may be different for each type of SP reach effect executed in the variable effect pattern of SP reach loss. For example, when a mission effect is performed as an SP reach effect, a scene change effect BT is performed by the character display and effect display shown in FIG. 131 (36), and when a battle effect is performed, FIG. 131 (36A) is used. The scene change effect BT by the blackout shown may be performed.
As the scene change effect BT, a logo display, a whiteout display, a flash display, or the like indicating the title of the gaming machine 1 may be performed according to the type of the stage and the type of the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach loss.

The display mode of the scene change effect BT performed in the variable effect pattern of SP reach loss is the display mode of the scene change effect displayed in the waiting state of the customer (for example, the manufacturer or distributor of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The display mode of the scene change effect (for example, the character related to the predetermined motif) is displayed as the stage change effect performed when the stage is switched in the normal mode or the maker name or the maker logo mark is displayed. At the same time, "Go
It is different from the character display of "To Next Stage").

In this way, when the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss is executed in the normal mode shown in FIG. 131, the three effect symbols 70a are lost from the temporary stop display state (changeable display state) by the reach display. A common type of image suggestion effect (design suggestion effect ZS, scene change effect BT) is executed a plurality of times (three times) until the fixed stop display state is reached in the combination display mode indicating Since it is possible to suggest that the effect symbol 70a indicating the reach loss is displayed as a fixed stop, the image suggestion effect does not develop into the SPSP reach, and the revival effect of recovering from the loss is not performed, and the player is concerned with the effect. It is possible to surely recognize that the variation effect is finished.

Further, in the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss in the normal mode shown in FIG. 131, the symbol suggestion effect ZS in which the display size and shape of the symbol change is performed a plurality of times, but the scene change effect BT by displaying the character image is It is not performed multiple times, but only once.

Further, in the variation effect of the normal loss variation effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 128, the symbol change operation by the stop indication effect symbol 70a and the symbol suggestion effect ZS (stop suggestion effect TS) by the change operation related to the effect on the effect symbol 70a are performed. However, the scene change production BT is not performed. That is, the scene change effect is more likely to be executed when the effect symbol 70a in the display mode showing the reach loss is stopped and displayed than when the effect symbol 70a in the display mode showing the normal loss is stopped and displayed.
It should be noted that even in the variation effect of the normal loss variation effect pattern, the symbol suggestion effect ZG of any of the scene change effect, the symbol change operation by the effect symbol 70a, and the change operation in which the effect is related to the effect symbol 70a may be performed. However, the ratio of performing the symbol suggestion effect ZG is set higher than the ratio of performing the scene change effect BT.

After the scene change effect BT is performed, a revival effect may be performed to expect that there is a possibility of a big hit revival. FIG. 133 shows an effect mode of the revival effect.
As shown in FIG. 133 (41), the combination display mode “2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)” showing the reach loss shown in FIG. 131 (37) or FIG. 132 (37) is temporarily stopped and displayed. After a certain minute of time has passed, the letters "NT Challenge" in the given color are displayed, and a halo flash that radiates a bright red flame from behind the letters is displayed, emphasizing the letters "NT Challenge". It is displayed and the challenge production CE is performed. When the characters "NT Challenge" are displayed, the icon TH and the hold icon (including the icon display area and the hold icon display area) are hidden, while the first and second hold number display areas 70E. , 70F continues to be displayed.

The characters "NT Challenge" are displayed in one of the display colors of "blue", "red", and "rainbow", and the challenge success expectation indicated by the display color is "blue" <"red" <"rainbow". It is set to be higher in the order of. If the rainbow-colored characters are displayed, it is suggested that the challenge success is rich (or confirmed), that is, the resurrection jackpot winning is rich (or confirmed), while the blue text image is If displayed, it suggests that the challenge is unlikely to succeed.

The challenge effect CH is a revival effect that is expected to be revived as a big hit after the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating reach loss. For example, the level meter accompanying the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 17 The meter change effect by the display is performed. In this case, if the level value of the level meter reaches MAX by continuous pressing during the operation valid period, the challenge is successful and the revival jackpot is achieved, but if it does not reach MAX, the challenge fails. It becomes a loss. It is possible to perform an impactful production that may turn the disappointment of the player's reach loss into joy.

As shown in FIG. 133 (42), when the challenge is successful, the characters "Challenge Success" are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "Challenge Success" are highlighted. .. Subsequently, (43) the movable member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and a rainbow flash is displayed with the start of this accessory operation to notify that the jackpot is won. (Result notification production). At this time, the three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "222" that normally indicates a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (44), the display mode is switched to "2 (dog) 2 (dog) 2 (dog)", and further, "222" of the (45) identification unit 70a2 is enlarged to decorate the decoration unit. It is suggested that the combination display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined by being highlighted in front of the "dog" of 71a1 (stop suggestion effect TS (symbol suggestion effect ZS)), and (46) the combination display mode indicating the normal jackpot " "2 (dog) 2 (dog) 2 (dog)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of "222" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. After the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the (47) 5R jackpot game will be executed are displayed, and the halo flash EF is displayed from behind the characters. The letters "BONUS" are highlighted.

On the other hand, if the challenge fails, the three effect symbols 70a will be displayed as a temporary stop after the combination display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" of reach loss is displayed, and the special symbol TZ will be displayed. The stop display is performed with the same combination of "232" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a.

FIGS. 134 and 135 show a display mode of a variation effect pattern per SPSP reach executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
In the case of developing to SPSP reach, as shown in FIG. 134 (51), either SP reach or SPSP reach is performed after the movement effect ME by the separation operation of the left and right effect symbols 70a "4 (chicken)" in the reach state is performed. A predetermined transition effect SH suggesting a transition to chicken is performed. In some cases, the SPSP reach may be transferred after passing through the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 134 (52), in the transition effect SH, the entire display unit is temporarily whitened (whiteout), so that the display of the effect symbol 70a becomes faint and disappears. By performing the transition effect SH, the player can recognize that the player has developed into either SP reach or SPSP reach.

Further, in the transition effect SH, as shown in FIG. 134 (53), the left and right effect symbols 70a are rotated and moved to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the display unit, and the decorative portion 70a1 “chicken” is erased. The effect of switching to the reach state (changeable display state) in which the reduced symbol ZG (effect symbol 70a) of only "4" of the part 70a2 is displayed is performed.

After the transition effect SH, when the SPSP reach is developed, the SPSP reach effect SSE is performed as shown in FIG. 134 (54), and as the SPSP reach effect, for example, a battle effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character T engage in a battle. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 134 (55), when the ally character C2 makes a punch attack on the enemy character T to hunt down the enemy character T at the end of the battle, the display mode is different from that of the battle effect (56). A scene change effect BT is performed by an eye-catching display that catches the player's line of sight and draws attention, which is displayed in a form that temporarily changes the scene. In the scene change effect BT, a red flash FF is emitted and displayed on the entire display unit, and it is suggested that the display mode shifts to a display mode for notifying the result of the battle effect (either the victory effect or the defeat effect). That is, it is suggested that either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is displayed as a fixed stop.

As shown in FIG. 134 (57), after the scene change effect BT, the effect suggestion effect is performed by the effect operation in which the effect button 17 changes from the normal state to the protruding state, and a bright color button imitating the effect button 17 is performed. An operation promotion effect SG is performed to indicate an image, a character prompting the operation of the effect button 17 of "press !!", and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17, and further, a lamp suggesting that the effect button 17 emits red light. The production is performed. Further, a lamp suggestion effect is performed in which the decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are lit for a predetermined time in a predetermined lighting pattern in accordance with the operation promotion effect SG.

As shown in FIG. 134 (58), when the effect button 17 in the protruding state is pressed, the left and right "4" reduced symbols ZG and the left and right "4" reduced symbols ZG are enlarged in the central region of the display unit. A symbol suggestion effect (ZS) is performed in which the symbol of the identification unit 70a2 "4" is displayed in the temporary stop display state, and the combination display mode "444" indicating the normal jackpot is displayed in the temporary stop display state.

As shown in FIG. 134 (59), the accessory effect YS in which the movable member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission (lamp suggestion effect) is performed, and the entire display unit is displayed in rainbow-colored color. An effect effect EF in which the effect is emitted and displayed is performed, and further, a voice suggestion effect by a sound effect is performed in accordance with the movement of the movable member 73. In addition, a symbol suggestion effect ZS is performed in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the reduced symbol ZG of the combination display mode "444" which normally indicates a big hit. It is suggested that the jackpot confirmation effect for definitely notifying that the jackpot is a big hit is performed by the accessory effect YS and the effect effect effect EF, and the combination display mode indicating the jackpot is fixedly stopped and displayed.

When the movable member 73 that has moved to the advanced position returns to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 134 (60), the light guide plate device (not shown) operates and the light guide plate 200 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A scene change effect BT is performed by the light guide plate, which emits light alternately in white and blue and displays a dark color image for lowering the brightness of the display unit and making the light emission of the light guide plate 200 stand out.

The light guide plate device is provided so as to cover the front surface of the effect space 40a inside the decorative frame 40. The light guide plate device is provided with two light guide plates that are stacked so that the rear can be seen through, and a light emitting unit (LED) that faces the side surface of each light guide plate and irradiates the inside of the light guide plate with light. Has been done. The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects (exits) the light emitted from the light emitting portion toward the front, and the reflecting portion provides an object such as a predetermined pattern (pattern (star pattern) or character). ) Is formed. Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion is reflected by the reflecting portion, a predetermined pattern (star pattern) appears to emerge.

As shown in FIG. 134 (61), the symbol suggestion effect ZS is performed in which the combination display mode "444" is displayed in the temporarily stopped display state only by the identification unit 70a2 "4" which normally indicates a big hit. The three symbols of only the identification unit 70a2 are overlapped with each other and the central symbol is enlarged more than the left and right symbols (that is, the left and right symbols are displayed in the occupied area occupied by the central symbol in the display unit). It is displayed in a state larger than the occupied area occupied by the part), and a flash effect is performed by a radial flash from behind the three symbols, and there is a possibility that a fixed stop display is performed in a combination display mode showing a jackpot to the player. It is suggested that there is.

After the temporary stop display states of the three symbols are displayed for a predetermined minute time, a victory confirmation effect indicating that the ally character C2 has won the enemy character T is performed as shown in FIG. 134 (62). At this time, the symbol suggestion effect ZS is performed in which the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 134 (61) is switched to the reduced symbol ZG of "444" and temporarily stopped and displayed. After the victory confirmation effect, the symbol suggestion effect ZS in which the reduced symbol ZG of (63) "444" is switched to the enlarged display mode and temporarily stopped and displayed is performed. The special symbol TZ is changing.

As shown in FIG. 134 (64), after the symbol “444” shown in FIG. 134 (63) is displayed for a predetermined minute time, a scene change effect BT in which a blue flash FF is emitted and displayed on the entire display unit is displayed. At the same time, a button image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed. At this time, the symbol suggestion effect ZG is performed in which the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 134 (63) is switched to the reduced symbol ZG of “444” and the temporary stop display state is set.

As shown in FIG. 135 (65), when the effect button 17 is operated or is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, a scene change effect BT in which the silver effect EF is emitted and displayed on the entire display unit is performed. After that, the reduced symbol ZG of "444" shown in FIG. 134 (64) is enlarged to display the normal size "4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) 4 (chicken)" including the decorative portion 70a1. A symbol suggestion effect ZG that switches to and is in a temporary stop display state is performed, and (67) "444" of the identification unit 70a2 is enlarged and highlighted in front of the "chicken" of the decoration unit 70a1 to be a jackpot symbol. It is suggested that the combination display mode of is in the fixed stop display state (stop suggestion effect TS) (design suggestion effect ZS), (68) the combination display mode "4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) showing a normal jackpot. ) ”Is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of“ 444 ”as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 38.

As shown in FIG. 135 (69), after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 5R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and the halo flash GF is emitted from behind the characters. .. The halo flash is displayed by emitting light so that a ring with striations radiating from the back of the character changes instantaneously alternately in red and blue.

When a minute time has passed since the display mode of "4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) 4 (chicken)" shown in FIG. 135 (66) was set to the temporary stop display state, FIGS. 135 (67) and (68) You may display a moving image suggesting that the design is confirmed without performing the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 135 (70), a scene change effect BT (stop suggestion effect TS) in which a moving image suggesting the type of jackpot game corresponding to the normal jackpot is displayed is performed, and (69) “BONUS” Along with displaying the characters, a halo flash is emitted from behind the characters, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444".

FIG. 136 shows a display mode of the promotion effect.
As shown in FIG. 136 (71), after the display mode shown in FIG. 135 (61) is displayed for a predetermined minute time, a promotion effect (re-lottery effect) for notifying whether or not to promote from a normal jackpot to a probabilistic jackpot. Is done.
In this promotion effect, the three symbols are synchronized and fluctuated again with the same combination of symbols (for example, all kinds of numbers of the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a are lapped once (“1” → “2” ... (Scroll display in the order of "9" → "1") is always visible, and it fluctuates synchronously for a predetermined time, and the three symbols are either a combination display mode showing a normal jackpot or a combination display mode showing a probability variation jackpot. A promotion effect is performed that suggests whether or not to be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot by inciting whether or not it will be stopped at.

When an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed when the promotion effect is being performed, and a promotion success effect that suggests that the player has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot is performed, as shown in FIG. 136 (72). When the effect button 17 is operated, the movable member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission (lamp suggestion effect), and a rainbow flash is displayed on the entire display unit. It is notified that the flash production EF has been performed and the player has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot. At this time, the symbol suggestion effect ZG in which the reduced symbol ZG is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "555" indicating the probability variation jackpot is performed.

As shown in FIG. 136 (73), when the movable member 73 that has moved to the advanced position returns to the standby position, the reduced symbol ZG of "555" is switched to a display mode enlarged to a size that protrudes from the display unit. The symbol suggestion effect ZS that is stopped and displayed is performed. Subsequently, (74) a scene change effect BT is performed by an effect effect in which a golden effect is displayed on the entire display unit.

As shown in FIG. 137 (75), a symbol suggestion that the enlarged display returns to the normal display size and switches to the display mode of "5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala)" including the decorative portion 38a. The production ZS is performed, and subsequently, (76) "555" of the identification unit 70a2 is enlarged and highlighted in front of the "koala" of the decoration unit 70a1, suggesting that the combination display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined. (Stop suggestion effect TS (symbol suggestion effect ZS), (77) Combination display mode "5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala)" (big hit symbol B) indicating a probability variation jackpot is displayed as a definite stop, and at the same time The special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of "555" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a.

As shown in FIG. 137 (78), after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed, and a halo flash is emitted from behind the characters to notify that a 10R jackpot game will be performed. Will be done. The halo flash GF is displayed by emitting light so that a ring with striations radiating from the back of the character changes instantaneously alternately in gold and silver.

When a minute time has passed after the display mode of "5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala)" shown in FIG. 137 (75) is temporarily stopped, FIG. 137 (76) and (77) are performed. Instead, a production video showing a character or dialogue or a production video suggesting the type of jackpot game may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (79), it is suggested that an effect video suggesting the type of the jackpot game is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed by displaying the type of the jackpot game (stop suggestion). (Direction TS), (78) The characters "BIG BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game will be performed are displayed, and the halo flash GF is emitted from behind the characters, and the special symbol TZ is a combination of "555". It is stopped and displayed in the display mode.

In this way, the promotion effect is executed after the combination display mode indicating the jackpot is temporarily stopped and before the stop suggestion effect TS is performed, that is, the promotion effect is not performed after the stop suggestion effect TS is performed. , It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the promotion effect is performed until the stop suggestion effect is performed.

When the combination display mode (for example, 7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig) (big hit symbol A)) indicating that the 10R jackpot game is performed without the promotion effect is displayed as a fixed stop. , Is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 134 and 135.

On the other hand, when the promotion effect shown in FIG. 136 (71) is performed and the promotion failure effect suggesting that the effect button 17 is operated to not promote to the probabilistic jackpot is performed, the character effect YS by the movable member 73 is performed. Instead, as shown in FIG. 136 (75), a symbol suggestion effect ZS was performed in which the three symbols of "444" enlarged to a size protruding from the display unit were temporarily stopped and displayed, followed by (76). The enlarged display returns to the normal display size, switches to the display mode of "444" only for the identification unit 70a2, and the symbol suggestion effect ZG for which the display is temporarily stopped is performed. (70) is performed.

In this way, in the variation effect related to the jackpot variation effect pattern in the normal mode, the jackpot changes from the changeable display state of the temporary stop display state (or the jackpot symbol is the temporary stop display, the special symbol TZ variation display state) by the reach display. Since the common type of suggestion effect (design suggestion effect, scene change effect, effect, flash) is executed multiple times before the fixed stop display state is reached in the combination display mode indicating, the reach display is temporarily stopped (from). By these suggestive effects, it is possible to suggest that the effect symbol 70a indicating the jackpot is displayed as a fixed stop, and it is possible to enhance the feeling of excitement for the player to win the jackpot.

In the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the jackpot, the symbol suggestion effect in which the three effect symbols 70a are displayed in the combination display mode indicating the jackpot is performed a plurality of times, and the character suggestion effect by the effect button 17 (FIG. 134 (57)). )) And the light guide plate 200, the scene change effect (FIG. 135 (59)) is not performed a plurality of times but only once.

FIG. 138 shows a display mode of a variation effect pattern of SPSP reach loss executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 138 (80), at the end of the battle as shown in FIG. 134 (55), when the ally character C2 makes a punch attack on the enemy character T and hunts down the enemy character T, FIG. 134 ( After the scene change effect BT by the effect effect shown in 56) is performed, the situation is reversed, the ally character C2 is defeated by the enemy character T, and the defeat confirmation effect indicating that the ally character C2 is defeated in the battle is performed. .. At this time, the symbol suggestion effect ZS in which the three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "454" indicating the reach loss is performed.

As shown in FIG. 138 (81), the scene change effect BT is performed after the defeat confirmation effect. In the scene change effect BT, a character related to a predetermined motif is displayed, and a ring-shaped effect surrounding the character is emitted and displayed. After the scene change effect BT, from the display mode of the reduced symbol ZG of the combination display mode "454" indicating (82) reach loss, the normal size of "4 (chicken) 5 (coala) 4 (chicken)" including the decorative portion 70a1. The symbol suggestion effect ZS that is temporarily stopped and displayed is performed by switching to the display state of (83), the display mode in which the temporary stop is displayed is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is the same as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. The stop display is performed in the combination display mode of "454". Immediately after the scene change effect, the combination display mode "4 (chicken) 5 (coala) 4 (chicken)" indicating the reach loss may be displayed as a definite stop.

FIG. 139 shows a display mode of the variation effect pattern of the normal loss and a display mode of the variation effect pattern of the normal reach loss executed in the probability variation mode corresponding to the probability variation game state.
For example, after the 5R jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 139 (91), the character "Zan RUSH rush" is displayed to notify that the player is entering the probability variation mode corresponding to the probability variation game state, and the character behind the character is displayed. A halo flash is displayed from the light source, a right-handed image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a is displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "555". To.

For example, when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the 5R jackpot game is completed, the character "Chance time rush" is displayed to notify that the time-saving mode is entered, and the characters are displayed from behind the character image. An optical flash is displayed.

After entering the probability change mode, game balls are continuously won in the second starting port 47, three second hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D, and further in the second hold icon display area 70D. 2 With the reserved number "3" displayed in the reserved number display area 70F and the reserved number "0" displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, although not shown, the combination display mode "5" indicating a jackpot is shown. After "(Koala) 5 (Koala) 5 (Koala)" is displayed, the variation display of the effect symbol 38 is started, and the variation display of the special symbol TZ is also started.
In the probability variation mode, the variation start suggestion effect suggesting the start of variation of the effect symbol shown in FIG. 128 (2) or the like is not performed, or the variation start suggestion effect may be performed in the same manner as in the normal mode.

The display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the probabilistic mode is different from the display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the normal mode. In the sword RUSH (corresponding to RUSH1 in FIG. 126 (2)), the effect symbol 70a is composed of the decorative portion 70a1 of the frame display and the identification portion 70a2 of the numbers "1" to "9". Although not shown, when RUSH2 shown in FIG. 126 (2) is performed, the effect symbol 70a having only the identification units 70a1 of the numbers "1" to "9" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 139 (92), as the effect symbol 70a starts to change, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D shifts to the change icon display area 70C, and the change occurs. The icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the hold number in the second hold number display area 70F is subtracted from "3" to "2".
In the probability variation mode, the variation start operation at the start of the symbol variation display is not executed in the normal mode. Alternatively, the fluctuation start operation may be performed at the start of fluctuation of the symbol in the probability variation mode. In this case, for example, the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a whose fixed stop display may be displayed may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 139 (93), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 38 is performed for a short time (2.0 seconds), the combination display mode “6 (frame)” in which the three effect symbols 70a show normal loss. ) 3 (frame) 2 (frame) ”at the same time, the temporary stop display is displayed, and the momentary flame effect EF is displayed at“ 632 ”of the identification unit 70a2 of the three effect symbols 38. ) Is performed, and the display mode of (94) "6 (frame) 3 (frame) 2 (frame)" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is the same as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a of "632". It is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode. The symbol confirmation period in which the effect symbol 70a is fixedly stopped and displayed is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern to be executed and the determination result of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 139 (95), when the symbol determination period elapses, the three effect symbols 70a are displayed at high speed for a predetermined time, and then (96) the effect symbol 70a of "2 (frame)" is displayed in the left area. Is temporarily stopped, and subsequently, when the effect symbol 70a of "2 (frame)" is temporarily stopped in the right area (97), the left and right effect symbols 38 are in a reach state with the same symbol. 98) The display size of the left and right "2 (frames)" temporarily stopped is expanded (the occupied area occupied by the left and right "2 (frames)" is expanded). Normal reach production NE will be performed from. By enlarging the left and right effect symbols 38, the player can be made to recognize that the reach state has been established.

As shown in FIG. 139 (99), as a normal reach effect NE, a meter change effect is performed by a level meter display accompanying a continuous pressing operation of the effect button 17 by the player. In this case, if the level value of the level meter reaches MAX by continuous pressing during the valid period of the operation, the challenge is successful and a big hit is achieved, while if the challenge is not reached, the challenge fails and the player loses.

As shown in FIG. 139 (100), in the case of a challenge failure after the effect valid period has elapsed without the effect button 17 being operated or the effect button 17 being operated, the combination display mode “2 (frame) 5 (2 (frame)) 5 ( When "frame) 2 (frame)" is temporarily stopped and displayed, a scene change effect BT is performed in which the entire display unit is temporarily blacked out as shown in FIG. 140 (101), and (102) "2 (frame)" is displayed. ) 5 (frame) 2 (frame) ”is displayed as a fixed stop display, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of“ 252 ”as that of the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. After the symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the three effect symbols 70a (103) start the high-speed variable display, and the special symbol TZ also starts the variable display.

Although not shown, when the variation effect pattern of SP reach loss and the variation effect pattern of SPSP reach loss are performed in the probability variation mode, the scenes shown in FIGS. 131 (36) and 132 (36A) described above. After the conversion effect BT, the effect symbol 70a in the combination display mode indicating the reach loss is fixedly stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 141 and 142 show a display mode of a jackpot variation effect pattern executed in a probability variation mode corresponding to a probability variation game state.
As shown in FIG. 141 (110), when the symbol determination period elapses, after the high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 70a is performed for a predetermined time, the effect symbol 70a of "7 (frame)" is displayed in the left area (111). Is temporarily stopped, and subsequently, when the effect symbol 70a of "7 (frame)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right area of (112), the left and right effect symbols 70a are in a reach state in which they are aligned with the same symbol. 113) The display size of the left and right "7 (frames)" temporarily stopped is expanded (the occupied area occupied by the left and right "7 (frames)" is expanded). A predetermined transition effect SH suggesting a transition to either SP reach or SPSP reach is performed. In some cases, the SPSP reach may be transferred after passing through the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 141 (114), in the transition effect SH, the display of the effect symbol 70a is thinned and disappears by temporarily whitening the entire display unit (whiteout). By performing the transition effect SH, the player can recognize that the player has developed into either SP reach or SPSP reach.

Further, in the transition effect SH, as shown in FIG. 141 (115), the left and right effect symbols 70a are rotated and moved to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the display unit, and the decorative portion 70a1 "frame" is erased. An effect of switching to the reduced symbol ZG (effect symbol 70a) of "7" of only the portion 70a2 is performed.

After the transition effect SH, when the SPSP reach is developed, the SPSP reach effect SSE is performed as shown in FIG. 141 (116), and for example, "A", "B", and "C" are marked as the SPSP reach effect. After the roulette R rotates in the K direction to incite which of "A", "B", and "C" is selected, "A" is performed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. , "B", or "C" is determined by the roulette effect. Then, when "A" is determined, it is set to be a big hit. Further, when the roulette effect is being performed, the reduced symbol ZG is temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state "7 ↓ 7".

As shown in FIG. 141 (117), an operation promotion effect BG indicating a character prompting the operation of the rainbow-colored “press!” Effect button 17 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 is performed, and the effect button is performed. When 17 is operated, or when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 17, the rotation speed of the roulette gradually slows down, and "A" is stopped and displayed on the upper end side of the roulette. When (118), the symbol suggestion effect ZG in which the combination display mode "777" indicating the probability variation jackpot by only the identification unit 70a2 "7" is displayed in the temporarily stopped display state is performed. In these three symbols having only the identification unit 70a2, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area near the upper left and right ends with the reduced symbol ZG, and the central symbol is enlarged in the central region than the left and right reduced symbols ZG. It is highlighted with.

As shown in FIG. 141 (119), the movable member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and the characters "success" and the halo flash are displayed from behind the characters. The word "success" is highlighted. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (120), the effect symbol 70a of "777" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a state of being enlarged to a size protruding from the display unit, and it is highlighted that it is a probabilistic jackpot. Subsequently, (121) a scene change effect BT by the effect EF in which the golden effect is emitted and displayed on the entire display unit is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (122), the number of prize balls acquired in the probability variation mode (“Total 1200 GET”) is displayed, and the halo flash HF is displayed from behind the prize ball number display. A scene change production BT in which the number of prize balls won is highlighted is performed. Subsequently, (123) the three symbols are switched from the display mode shown in FIG. 142 (120) to the normal size, and the combination display mode "7 (frame) 7 (frame) 7 (frame) showing the probability variation jackpot including the decorative portion 70a". ) ”Is temporarily stopped, (124) the flame effect EF is displayed for a moment at“ 777 ”of the identification unit 70a2 of the three effect symbols 38, and (125)“ 7 (frame) 7 (frame) 7 ( The display mode of "frame)" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of "632" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a.

As shown in FIG. 142 (126), after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the characters "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters. , "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. In addition, the voice of "super bonus" is output according to the character display, and the light emitting body of the lamp repeatedly lights and blinks.

In this way, in the variation effect related to the jackpot variation effect pattern in the probability variation mode, the jackpot changes from the changeable display state of the temporary stop display state (or the jackpot symbol is the temporary stop display, the special symbol TZ variation display state) by the reach display. Since the common type of suggestion effect (symbol suggestion effect, scene change effect) is executed a plurality of times until the fixed stop display state is reached in the combination display mode indicating the above, the effect symbol 70a indicating a big hit is generated by these suggestion effects. It is possible to suggest that the confirmation stop display is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the feeling of excitement for the player's jackpot winning.

In the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the jackpot, the symbol suggestion effect in which the three effect symbols 70a are displayed in the combination display mode indicating the jackpot is performed a plurality of times, and the character suggestion effect by the effect button 17 (FIG. 141 (119)). )) Is not performed multiple times, but only once.

Further, in the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the jackpot, the combination display mode showing the jackpot from the changeable display state of the temporary stop display state by the reach display (or the changeable display state of the jackpot symbol is the temporary stop display and the special symbol TZ). By the time the fixed stop display state is reached, a symbol suggestion effect of the same type of display mode is performed in either the normal mode or the probabilistic mode, but the scene change effect by the light guide plate 200 and the effect operation of the effect button 17 are performed. The character suggestion effect by is performed in the normal mode but not in the probability change mode, and the scene change effect by the prize ball acquisition display is performed in the probability change mode but not in the normal mode.

In addition to the above, in the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of the jackpot, a combination showing the jackpot from the temporary stop display state by the reach display (or the changeable display state of the jackpot symbol is the temporary stop display and the variation display state of the special symbol TZ). By the time the fixed stop display state is reached in the display mode, the symbol suggestion effect and the scene change effect are performed in either the normal mode or the probability change mode, but the character suggestion effect is performed in the normal mode but in the probability change mode. It may not be performed. In the probabilistic game state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than that in the normal game state, and the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 47. Since the big hits are judged one after another and the next big hit is won in a relatively short time, there is little need to perform a character suggestion effect.

FIGS. 143 to 145 show a pre-reading advance notice mode in a normal loss variation effect pattern executed in a normal mode corresponding to a normal game state.
The pre-reading notice is a notice that expects that there is a possibility of winning a big hit over one or more variable effects corresponding to the special figure variable display before the variable effect corresponding to the special figure variable display to be announced is started. It is a production.

The look-ahead notice is when the special figure determination information is stored (held storage) in the storage unit, the conditions for executing the look-ahead notice are satisfied, and the pre-reading notice is won by a lottery for determining whether or not the look-ahead notice is executed. , The latest special figure determination information stored in the storage unit is used as a look-ahead target. As a condition for executing the look-ahead notice, for example, two or more special figure determination information including the look-ahead target is stored in the storage unit, and is stored before the special figure determination information set as the look-ahead target. Alternatively, it is set that the special figure judgment information of the big hit is not stored in the plurality of special figure judgment information.

If the conditions for executing the look-ahead notice are met, the look-ahead notice execution judgment table (
Whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is determined (determined) by using (not shown). The look-ahead advance notice execution judgment table is a decision value to be compared with the look-ahead notice decision random number value acquired from the advance notice decision random numbers (0 to 99) at the time of the advance judgment process, and determines whether or not the look-ahead notice is executed. A determination value for this is assigned in advance for each number of reserved storages.

The execution rate of the look-ahead notice varies depending on the number of reserved memories. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 4, the execution rate is 60% when the fourth reserved special figure determination information is to be read ahead, and when the number of reserved memories is 3, the 3 When the execution rate is 30% and the number of reserved special figures is 2 when the special figure judgment information to be held is the pre-reading target, the special figure judgment information to be held for the second is set as the pre-reading target. If so, the execution rate is set to 3%. That is, the larger the number of reserved special figure determination information is, the higher the execution rate of the look-ahead notice is set. By performing the pre-reading notice effect over a long period of time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of big hit and uplifting feeling by the time the pre-reading target variable effect is performed.

The look-ahead notice includes a continuous notice effect and a hold icon change notice effect. As a continuous advance notice effect, in one or a plurality of variation effects including the variation effect of the look-ahead target, a predetermined one or a plurality of loss variation effects prior to the accessory effect by the movable members 73 and 74 and the change effect of the look-ahead target. Opportunity to stop and display three effect symbols in an arrangement with regularity of the above. Effect effect display that displays the effect over one or more loss variation effects including the variation effect of the look-ahead target, frame lighting device. 10 decorative lamps (LEDs) and decorative lamps (LEDs) of the board lighting device 76 are lit for a predetermined time with a look-ahead-only lighting pattern different from the normal lighting pattern, a sound effect dedicated to look-ahead notice (BGM), and effects. It is possible to execute a sound effect such as outputting SE (sound effect) such as sound and dialogue from the sound output device 9 (speaker).

As shown in FIG. 143, in the normal mode, when the pre-reading notice for the third first hold storage as the pre-reading target is performed, the third first hold icon is the CD icon (normal icon) of "◎". ) Is displayed with a special icon of "★", which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit (holding icon change notice effect), and a notification sound is generated for 0.5 seconds. By displaying the hold icon as a special icon, the player can expect the player to perform a variable effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 143 (131), the three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop display for a predetermined time in the combination display mode "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" indicating normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination of "216" as the identification unit 70a2 of the symbol 38.

As shown in FIG. 143 (132), when the symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the confirmation stop display of the three production symbols 70a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" is displayed. The face of the "dog, cat, tiger" in the decorative part 70a1 is enlarged, and the variable start operation in which the eyes of the "dog, cat, tiger" are changed is performed. It is suggested that the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is started by the different display modes.

As shown in FIG. 143 (133), when the variable display of the three effect symbols 70a is started, a chance effect CA is performed in which the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with blue light emission. It is suggested that there is a possibility of a big hit in the variable effect after the variable effect. After the three effect symbols 70a perform high-speed fluctuation display for a predetermined time, the identification unit 70a2 "1" is momentarily enlarged when the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left area (134). After performing the symbol changing operation that changes to the display mode emphasized by the decorative portion 70a1, (135) the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" is in the temporary stop display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (136), when the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right side region, the identification portion 70a2 “4” is momentarily enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. After performing the symbol change operation that changes to the display mode to be displayed, the effect symbol 70a of (137) “4 (chicken)” is in the temporary stop display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (138), when the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central region, the three effect symbols 70a are the first chances of normal loss (FIG. 123 (FIG. 123 (Fig. 123)). 1) is shown in the combination display mode "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 4 (chicken)", and the identification unit 70a2 "124" is momentarily enlarged to indicate a stop suggestion effect TS and a momentary flame emission change operation chance effect. After performing CA, (139) three production symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop in the combination display mode "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 4 (chicken)" indicating the first chance of normal loss, and are special. The symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "124" as the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. For the special symbol TZ, the stop suggestion effect TS is not performed and the stop is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (140), after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the decoration part 70a1 of the three production symbols 70a of "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 4 (chicken)" displayed as a confirmation stop is displayed. The face of "cat, dog, chicken" is enlarged, and the fluctuation start operation (variation start suggestion effect HS) that changes the eyes of "cat, dog, chicken" is performed, and the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started. The dog.

As shown in FIG. 144 (141), when the variation display of the three effect symbols 70a is started, the chance effect CA in which the flash effect EF is emitted and displayed on the entire display unit is performed, and the variation after the variation effect is performed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that a variable production with a high expectation of winning a big hit will be performed in the production. After the three effect symbols 70a perform high-speed fluctuation display for a predetermined time, the identification unit 70a2 "1" is momentarily enlarged when the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left area (142). After performing the symbol changing operation that changes to the display mode emphasized by the decorative portion 70a1, (143) the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" is in the temporary stop display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (144), when the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right side region, the identification portion 70a2 "2" is momentarily enlarged and emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1. After performing the symbol change operation that changes to the display mode to be displayed (145), the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is in the temporary stop display state.

In the central region of FIG. 144 (146), the effect symbol 70a of "7 (pig)" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the three effect symbols 70a are combined displays indicating the second chance of normal loss (see FIG. 123 (1)). In the mode "1 (cat) 7 (pig) 2 (dog)", the identification unit 70a2 "172" is momentarily enlarged to perform a stop suggestion effect TS and a momentary flame emission change operation chance effect CA (147). ) Three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop in the combination display mode "1 (cat) 7 (pig) 2 (dog)" indicating the second chance, and the special symbol TZ is displayed with the identification unit 70a2 of the effect symbol 70a. The same combination of "172" is displayed as a stop. For the special symbol TZ, the stop suggestion effect TS is not performed and the stop is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (148), after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the decoration part 70a1 of the three production symbols 70a of "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 4 (chicken)" displayed as the confirmation stop is displayed. The face of the "cat, dog, chicken" is enlarged, and the variation start operation (variation start suggestion effect HS) in which the eyes of the "cat, dog, chicken" change is performed, and the variation effect of the look-ahead target is performed.

As shown in FIG. 145 (149), when the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in the variation effect of the look-ahead target, the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right area (150). Occasionally, after the identification unit 70a2 "2" is momentarily enlarged to perform a symbol change operation that changes to a display mode that is emphasized more than the decorative portion 70a1, (151) the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped. It becomes a state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (152), the reach fanning effect RA suggesting that the reach is established or the reach is not established by inciting whether or not the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right area. Is done. In the reach fanning effect RA, a character related to the motif appears, and this character makes a kick attack on the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right area, and the kick is made. An effect is performed to incite that the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" may be destroyed by the attack and the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" may be temporarily stopped and displayed. This reach fanning effect makes it possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the player will be in the reach state.

As shown in FIG. 145 (153), in the reach fanning effect RA, if the effect symbol 70a of "1 (cat)" is not finally destroyed, "1 (cat)" is temporarily stopped and displayed as it is. , A combination display mode (for example, "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 1 (cat)") indicating normal loss is displayed as a definite stop.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (154), in the reach fanning effect, the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is finally destroyed, and the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped. Then, it becomes a reach state. After that, the same effect mode as that shown in FIGS. 129 (16) and 130 is performed, and finally, a combination display mode (for example, "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating reach loss is performed. Is displayed as a confirmed stop.

In this way, in the normal mode, the chance eye display, the effect operation of the movable member 73, and the chance effect by the effect display are performed over one or a plurality of variation effects before the advance notice target variation effect is started. You can expect that there is a possibility of winning a big hit with a variable production.
In addition, in the variation effect related to the variation effect pattern of normal loss in which the chance eye before the start of the variation effect to be announced is fixed and stopped, the symbol suggestion effect ZS is performed, but the scene change effect BT is not performed. .. That is, the scene change effect BT is more likely to be executed in the variation effect related to the SP / SPSP reach loss variation pattern than in the variation effect related to the normal loss variation effect pattern in which the chance eye is fixedly stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the reach fanning effect is performed in the variable effect of the look-ahead target, and the three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop in the combination display mode showing the reach loss, and when the fixed stop is displayed in the combination display mode showing the normal loss. There is.

In the probabilistic mode as well, as in the normal mode, the chance effect is performed over one or a plurality of variable effects that are executed before the variable effect of the advance notice is started.
Here, in the probabilistic game state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than in the normal game state, and the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47. Therefore, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed one after another, and comparison is performed. You will win the next big hit in a short time. Therefore, the chance production is performed with one or more fluctuation productions before the fluctuation production of the notice target is started, but the probability change mode performs the chance production more than the normal mode, and the fluctuation production of the notice target becomes a normal loss. Easy to become.

Further, even in the probabilistic mode, when the reach fanning effect is performed in the variable effect to be announced and the three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop in the combination display mode showing the reach loss, and when the fixed stop is displayed in the combination display mode showing the normal loss, the fixed stop is displayed. There are times when.

In the probabilistic mode, when the reach fanning effect is performed in the variable effect to be announced, the reach loss is more likely to occur than the normal loss. As described above, in the probabilistic game state, the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol is performed one after another, and the next jackpot is won in a relatively short time. This will make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above description, the reach fanning effect is performed in the variable effect of the advance notice, but the reach fanning effect is performed over one or a plurality of variable effects executed before the variable effect of the advance notice is started. You may.
In the probabilistic mode, when the reach fanning effect is performed over one or more variable effects executed before the variable effect of the advance notice is started, the variation effect of the advance notice tends to be a normal loss.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. When the symbol that is variablely displayed in (Stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, the predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3) (Symbol alignment) can be executed, and the predetermined effect includes a plurality of different types of predetermined effects (character operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment). Regardless of which mode of the first mode (normal) and the second mode (probability variation) is controlled, when the special display mode (hit) is displayed, it is common among the plurality of predetermined effects. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the type (three symbols are aligned).

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. When the symbol that is variablely displayed in (Stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, the predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3) (Symbol alignment) can be executed, and the predetermined effect includes a plurality of different types of predetermined effects (character operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment). Regardless of which mode of the first mode (normal) and the second mode (probability variation) is controlled, when the special display mode (hit) is displayed, the plurality of predetermined effects are different. It is possible to perform various types of predetermined effects (character operation and 3 symbol alignment).

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. When the symbol that is variablely displayed in (Stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, the predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3) (Symbol alignment) can be executed, and the predetermined effect includes a plurality of different types of predetermined effects (character operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment). When the game is controlled in the first mode (normal), when the special display mode (hit) is displayed, a plurality of predetermined effects (three symbols aligned) of a common type among the plurality of predetermined effects are displayed. It can be executed twice (twice).

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. When the symbol that is variablely displayed in (Stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, the predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3) (Symbol alignment) can be executed, and the predetermined effect includes a plurality of different types of predetermined effects (character operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment). When the game is controlled in the second mode (probability variation), when the special display mode (hit) is displayed, a plurality of predetermined effects (three symbols aligned) of a common type among the plurality of predetermined effects are displayed. It can be executed twice (twice).

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). The symbol that is variablely displayed is changed from the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. When the symbol that is variablely displayed in (Stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, the predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3) (Symbol alignment) can be executed, and the predetermined effect includes a plurality of different types of predetermined effects (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment). Regardless of which mode of the first mode (normal) or the second mode (probability variation) is controlled, when the special display mode (hit) is displayed, any of the plurality of predetermined effects It is possible to execute a predetermined type of effect (3 symbols aligned) that is common to both modes and a predetermined type of effect (light guide plate / prize ball acquisition display) that is executed only in one mode.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbols in a plurality of rows are changed according to the result of the determination. In a gaming machine capable of performing a display and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special display result, the symbol is difficult to see in the first aspect (variable display). A display control means capable of variable display in any of the second aspect (stop display aspect), which is easier to see than the first aspect, and whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made. The display control means includes a pre-determination means for performing the pre-determination, and the display control means changes the symbol in the first aspect (variation display mode) and then changes the display in the second aspect (stop display mode). The symbols that are variablely displayed and are variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) are arranged in a changeable display state (variable display state by a small symbol, a temporary stop display state by a reach display), and three symbols. It is possible to change from the swaying display state of the state to the fixed stop display state, and to expect the execution of the special game based on the pre-judgment result. Is feasible, and regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (disappearance) that does not result in the special display result is displayed, the second mode ( It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (flash, scene change effect) when the symbol to be displayed is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, and it changes in the second mode (stop display mode). When the displayed symbol is displayed in the non-special display mode (loss), the first effect (scene change effect) among the plurality of predetermined effects of different types can be executed, and the second aspect (stop display) is possible. The symbols that are variablely displayed in (Aspect) are displayed in the case where the chance effect is executed and displayed in the first symbol combination (disjoint loss) and in the second symbol combination (reach loss) different from the first symbol combination. In some cases, it is easier to execute the first effect (scene change effect) when the second symbol combination (reach loss) is displayed than when the first symbol combination (disappearance) is displayed.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. Predetermined effects (whiteout, blackout, flash, scene change effect) can be executed when the symbol that is variablely displayed in (stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, and the first mode is described above. When the game is controlled in (normal), when the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) is displayed in the non-special display mode (loss), the first effect is as the predetermined effect. (Scene change effect) can be executed, and the case where the symbol displayed in the non-special display mode (loss) is displayed in the first symbol combination (disappearance) and the case where the symbol is different from the first symbol combination In the case of displaying the symbol combination (reach loss), the case of displaying the second symbol combination (reach loss) is more the case of displaying the first effect (scene change effect) than the case of displaying the first symbol combination (bara loss). ) Is easy to execute.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The display control means variablely displays the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode), then variablely displays the symbol in the second mode (stop display mode), and changes the symbol to the second mode (stop display mode). From the changeable display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state. The second aspect may be displayed regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. Predetermined effects (whiteout, blackout, flash, scene change effect) can be executed when the symbol that is variablely displayed in (stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, and the second mode is described above. When the game is controlled by (probability variation), when the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) is displayed in the non-special display mode (loss), the first effect is as the predetermined effect. (Scene change effect) can be executed, and the case where the symbol displayed in the non-special display mode (loss) is displayed in the first symbol combination (disappearance) and the case where the symbol is different from the first symbol combination In the case of displaying the symbol combination (reach loss), the case of displaying the second symbol combination (reach loss) is more the case of displaying the first effect (scene change effect) than the case of displaying the first symbol combination (bara loss). ) Is easy to execute.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The special game includes the first special game (5R) and the second special game (1), which has a higher degree of advantage than the first special game.
It has a plurality of special games including 0R), and the display control means uses the symbol as the first aspect (0R).
After the variable display in the variable display mode), the variable display is performed in the second mode (stop display mode), and the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) can be changed. It is possible to change from the display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state, which is the special display result. Regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result is displayed, the symbol that is variablely displayed changes in the second mode (stop display mode). When the display state is changed from the possible display state to the fixed stop display state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment), and the special display mode is described above. When (hit) is displayed in a symbol combination indicating that the second special game (10R) is executed, the first mode (probability variation) is higher than the case where the game is controlled in the second mode (probability variation). When the game is controlled by (normal), it is easier to execute the first effect (character effect, promotion effect) among the plurality of predetermined effects of different types.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. A display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and a mode control means capable of controlling a game in any one of a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal) and a second mode (probability variation) are provided. The special game includes the first special game (5R) and the second special game (1), which has a higher degree of advantage than the first special game.
It has a plurality of special games including 0R), and the display control means uses the symbol as the first aspect (0R).
After the variable display in the variable display mode), the variable display is performed in the second mode (stop display mode), and the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) can be changed. It is possible to change from the display state (including the variable display state by the small symbol, the temporary stop display state by the reach display, and the shaking display state in the state where the three symbols are aligned) to the fixed stop display state, which is the special display result. Regardless of whether the special display mode (hit) or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result is displayed, the symbol that is variablely displayed changes in the second mode (stop display mode). When the display state is changed from the possible display state to the fixed stop display state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (feature operation, effect, symbol enlargement / reduction / rotation, etc., eye catch, character movement, 3 symbol alignment), and the special display mode is described above. When (hit) is displayed in a symbol combination indicating that the first special game (5R) is executed, the first mode (probability variation) is higher than the case where the game is controlled in the second mode (probability variation). When the game is controlled by (normal), it is easier to execute the first effect (character effect, promotion effect) among the plurality of predetermined effects of different types.

◆ According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and if the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special display result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the symbol is either a first mode (variable display mode) that is difficult to see and a second mode (stop display mode) that is easier to see than the first mode. The display control means is provided with display control means capable of variable display depending on the mode, and the display control means changes the symbol in the first mode (variable display mode) and then changes in the second mode (stop display mode). The symbols that are displayed and variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) are displayed in a changeable display state (variable display state by small symbols, temporary stop display state by reach display), and three symbols are aligned. It is possible to change from the shaking display state (including the shaking display state) to the fixed stop display state, and in either the special display mode (hit) that results in the special display result or the non-special display mode (loss) that does not result in the special display result. Even if it is displayed, when the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) is changed from the changeable display state to the fixed stop display state, a predetermined effect (character operation, effect, symbol enlargement / It is possible to perform eye catch (IC), character movement, 3 symbol alignment, etc., such as reduction / rotation, and the symbol that is variablely displayed in the second mode (stop display mode) is the special display mode (hit). The effect mode of the predetermined effect differs depending on whether it is displayed or displayed in the non-special display mode (loss).

(When the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Next, a case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described. When the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, for example, the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is not received, the command is not received due to a half disconnection or a connector disconnection. Communication abnormalities such as abnormal command reception due to garbled commands due to noise or half-breakage are considered. In the following description, when a predetermined state occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, it is represented by "x" in the figure. Then, in a predetermined period from the first occurrence of a predetermined state in which the command cannot be received normally to the time before the command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and / or different types may not be received normally. .. In addition, the command is described as "cd" in the figure.

The effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a rod-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part consisting of a design effect image ZE to be decorated, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Further, it is assumed that the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed of only the identification unit including the number unit (identification character).

Further, in the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation). Further, in the specific game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation).

When the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state will be described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), it is basic. The flow is the same as in the normal game state.

Specifically, the first hold number, the first special symbol memory designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol hold display 63, the sub first variable display 81, and the sub first. 1 Hold indicator 83, 1st hold number display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp symbol, 1st start port 45, 2nd hold number, 2nd special symbol storage designation command, 1st 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd hold display 84, 2nd hold number display area 70F, 2nd hold icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 are effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 146. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the first special. It starts with the symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number (numerical information) displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Will be "1". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 (referred to as the first lamp symbol when particularly distinguished) are started to be varied, but the effect symbol 70a performs the preparatory operation. Start scrolling after going.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110 m by turning on / off / blinking the LED. The variation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by blinking the LED of the sub first variation indicator 81. Further, in the sub first hold indicator 83, the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed by turning on / off / blinking the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B2 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 147 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 147 (c)). In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol stops in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

Next, at the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative portion being operated or a whole or a part of being scaled as in the present embodiment (FIG. 147 (d)). reference).

After that, at the P5 timing, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 147 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 147 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 147 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 147 (g)).

Then, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub first hold indicator 83 continues, and the effect symbol 70a is the decorative portion as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing preparatory operations such as partial operation or full or partial expansion / contraction operation (see FIG. 147 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 147 (h)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“365”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the icon TH continues the rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 147 (i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 147 (i)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

At this time, the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P8). Also), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 147 (j)). Further, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continuously changed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). As described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect (predetermined effect) is not performed in the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P8.

As a predetermined effect to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol) in a state where the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110 m is "0". Is not limited to the customer waiting demonstration effect, but may be an adjustment guidance effect such as adjustment of volume or brightness of an image display device, a guidance effect related to game operation, or other effects. In this case, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the effect other than the customer waiting demo effect is executed. As described above, the predetermined effect includes an effect in which the temporarily stopped or main stopped effect symbol 70a is executed until the next variable effect is started. The predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may be executed by other commands, time by a timer, or the like.

As described above, according to the specific example 1 shown in FIGS. 146 to 147, when a predetermined state in which the command is not normally received occurs in the effect control unit 130 m while the effect symbol 70a is being effected. The effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be in a swinging state even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect to perform a customer-waiting demonstration effect. It is designed not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

After that, since the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the effect control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs a process for ending the variation effect.

In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P7, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it cannot be done will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG. 148 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 148. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 start the variation display of the first lamp symbol, but in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing a whole or part expansion / contraction operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. At this time, the winning command (first special symbol) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing when the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives the memory designation command and the first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command), the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "4". ". In Specific Example 2, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the first hold memory due to the winning of the timing of P1. In the following description, the hold memory that serves as the reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target hold memory.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 149 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 149 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 149 (c)), and the first lamp. This stop when the symbol is lost (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, a start command (first special symbol memory) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing when the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives the designation command, the effect symbol specification command, and the first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "4". 3 ”and the process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and scrolling is started after the preparatory operation is performed (see FIG. 149 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 149 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 149 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the variation display of the first lamp symbol continue. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 149 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 149 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 149 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 149 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are in a continuous state.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 149 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continuously. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 149 (i)). Here, in the specific example 2, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Even in the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 149 (i)), and the effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead zone production ends when is stopped.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 149-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the advance notice scenario. It is also possible to end the look-ahead zone production without executing. When the look-ahead zone effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead zone effect is deleted at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect.

(Specific example 3 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 150. FIG. 148 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 148. This is an example.

It should be noted that the specific example 3 of FIG. 150 is different from the specific example 2 of FIG. 149 in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the part to be done is omitted, and only the different part will be explained.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates or the whole or a part of the effect symbol 70a expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 150 (d)).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol are started to be variablely displayed, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 150 (d)), and an effect sound effect is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 150 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 150 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 150 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is continuously executed, and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 is "2". Except for, the state of FIG. 150 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 is "2". Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 150 (g) is maintained.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P9.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 150 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 150 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image are continued. Is executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is executed. Is scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 150 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 3, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 150-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) are performed according to the preview scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. When the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect effect is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

(Specific example 4 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 151. FIG. 148 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 148. This is an example.

In the specific example 4 of FIG. 151, the icon change effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and the effect by the first movable member 73 as the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect). Is different from the specific example 3 of FIG. 150 in that the above is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here, and only the different part will be described. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 3, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 2.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates or the whole or a part of the effect symbol 70a expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 151 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 151 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a. The partial period of the variation effect is the variation effect period from the start of the variation effect to the stop (temporary stop or main stop) of the variation effect, for example, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing of the start of the variation effect. The first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing during the variation effect, or the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing at the end of the variation effect. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect at various times, such as executing the look-ahead effect. Then, in this specific example, the look-ahead effect executed in a part of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 151 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 151 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 151 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 151 (g), except that the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is "2". State is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 151 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the operation of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 151 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is executed. Specifically, the operation effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73 are executed according to the advance notice scenario, and the sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 151 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect and the scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It will be in a state of scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 151 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". In (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are also executed. Then, the pre-reading advance notice effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a stops and displays, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 151-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are performed according to the advance notice scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. When the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead notice effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low. Further, the look-ahead effect by the first movable member 73 and the like is not executed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of P10. However, when the first hold number U1 changes from "4" to "2" and when the first hold number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, the main control unit 110m grasps. If the discrepancy between the number of holdings and the number of holdings grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

In Specific Examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P10. As described above, in the specific examples 2 to 4, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number during the display of the first hold information), the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons is displayed one less than the specific number and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 148 to 151, the specific number two more than the predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any need. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 5 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. 152 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 152. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 is started, but in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing a whole or part expansion / contraction operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" when the game ball wins the first starting port 45. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "4". In Specific Example 5, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the hold memory due to the winning of the timing of P1. In the following description, the hold memory that serves as the reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target hold memory.

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 153 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 153 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 153 (c)), and the first lamp. This stop when the symbol is lost (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 153 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 153 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 153 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 153 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 153 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 153 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 153 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 153 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is "1". At the timings of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not pass through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 and the surplus hold icon T12 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 are erased by non-animation for one frame. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 153). (H)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are in a continuous state.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 153 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continuously. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 153 (i)). Here, in the specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Even in the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 153 (i)), and the effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead zone production ends when is stopped.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 153-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the advance notice scenario. It is also possible to end the look-ahead zone production without executing. When the look-ahead zone effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead zone effect is deleted at the timing of P13, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect.

(Specific example 6 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 154. FIG. 152 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 152. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 6 of FIG. 154 is different from the specific example 5 of FIG. 153 in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect and the icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates or the whole or a part of the effect symbol 70a expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 154 (d)).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol are started to be variablely displayed, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 154 (d)), and an effect sound effect is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 154 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 154 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 154 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 154 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 154 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 154 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 154 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 to P11.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes "0" directly from "3" without passing through "2" and "1". Further, all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a which is erased by the non-animation of one frame of the surplus two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and deviated from the stop position ( The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 154 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the hold icon T13 is the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed in the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 154 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image are continued. Is executed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is executed at high speed. It will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 154 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 6, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 154-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) are performed according to the preview scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect effect is deleted (if displayed) at the timing of P12, and the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect effect, such as mode A background only. It is changed to the aspect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

(Specific example 7 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 7 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 155. FIG. 152 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 152. This is an example.

In the specific example 7 of FIG. 155, the icon change effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and the effect of the first movable member 73 as the look-ahead notice effect (movable effect and light emission effect). Is different from the specific example 6 of FIG. 155 in that the above is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here, and only the different part will be described. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 7, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 6.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates or the whole or a part of the effect symbol 70a expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 155 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 155 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. In addition, a predetermined sound effect is output. The look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 155 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)). At this time, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 155 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 155 (g), except that the pre-reading advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”. State is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 155 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 155 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 155 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

At the timings of P8 to P11, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not pass through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the surplus hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 is erased. T12 is erased with one frame of non-animation. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 155). (H)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the hold icon T13 is the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is executed. Specifically, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is executed according to the advance notice scenario, and the sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 155 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect and the scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number becomes "0" ( The look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the pre-reading advance notice effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a stops and displays, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 7, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 155-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are performed according to the advance notice scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped at the timing of P12, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead notice effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

According to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of P10. As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "1", that is, the difference between the hold number grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the hold number grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is ". If it is "3", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

In Specific Examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P12. As described above, in the specific examples 5 to 7, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (for example, four), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number during the display of the first hold information), the number of hold icons, which is one less than the specific number, is not displayed. It is designed to display a number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is not displayed and the number is higher than the specific number. Also displays two fewer hold icons, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, the specific number three more than the predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 4), the number of holds is one or two less than the specified number. The predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 8 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 8 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. FIG. 156 is a timing chart 4 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. 114. This is an example of production.

Since the specific example 8 of FIG. 157 is the same as the specific example 5 of FIG. 152 up to the timing of P0 to P11, the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol Fluctuation display of is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, it is in the state of FIG. 157 (g).

Next, at the timing of P13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 157 (g) is maintained.

At this time, the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P12). Also), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 157 (h)). Further, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continuously changed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. As described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed in the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P12.

As described above, according to the specific example 8 shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, when a predetermined state in which the command is not normally received occurs in the effect control unit 130 m while the effect symbol 70a is being effected. The effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be in a swinging state even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect to perform a customer-waiting demonstration effect. It is designed not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 157-1, since the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state may shift to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). .. When the effect control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs a process for ending the variation effect.

In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, extinguished).

Here, when the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the effect symbol 70a may be stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (turned off). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed in the first image display device 70.

As described above, according to the modified example of the specific example 8 shown in FIG. 157-1, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, , All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the predetermined stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable effect has been completed (shifted to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

At the timings of P7, P11, and P13, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m transmits based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the displayed effect command, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is output to the effect control unit 130 m. Will be processed in the same way as when it cannot be received normally.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received while the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m is "3" has been described, but the first hold number is Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states of "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

(Specific example 9 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 9 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 159 (a) to 158 are effects corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of FIG. 158. This is an example.

Since the specific example 8 of FIG. 157 and the specific example 9 of FIG. 159 are different in that the command received at the timing of P14 is the opening designation command, the description of the common part is omitted here, and the different parts are described. Only explain.

At the timing of P14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot game Processing is performed to start the opening effect of.

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is maintained at "3" and is displayed in the effect symbol 70a and the icon display area. The hold icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. Further, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in the loss mode (for example, extinguished), and the opening effect image is displayed (FIG. 159 (FIG. 159). h) See).

After that, if the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol memory designation command from the main control unit 110m during the big hit game or after the end of the big hit game (time saving game state, probability variation game state), The first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command without animation for one frame (see FIG. 159 (j)). .. Note that FIG. 159 (j) shows a case where the number of held commands at the start is "1". At this time, a predetermined (same) effect symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the combination of the effect symbols 70a. For example, regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a is a big hit with the combination of "777" or the combination of "222", as shown in FIG. 159 (j), the effect symbols 70a of "135" are in the same combination. Is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

At the timings of P7 to P13, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m is "3" at the timing of P14 has been described, but the first hold number is "4". , "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description even when the opening designation command is received.

As described above, according to the specific example 9 shown in FIGS. 158 to 159, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are not displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the jackpot game. The opening effect image of is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 10 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 160. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 start the variation display of the first lamp symbol, but in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing a whole or part expansion / contraction operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 161 (a)).

In the specific example 10, based on the first hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 161 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) in which the zone BGM is output is displayed. ) Is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 161 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 161 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 161 (c)), and the first lamp. This stop when the symbol is lost (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 161 (d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 161 (f)).

The look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at the timings of P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image is continuously scrolled, and the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 161 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 161 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 161 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 161 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the pre-reading zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are not continued, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 161). (H)).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

At the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 161 (h)). As described above, in the specific example 10, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 161 (i)).

At the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

(Specific example 11 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 11 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 162. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 160. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 10 of FIG. 161 and the specific example 11 of FIG. 162 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Now, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the specific example 10, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 161 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the jackpot is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 11, as the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon is being executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates or the whole or a part of the effect symbol 70a expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 162 (d)).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol are started to be variablely displayed, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. In addition, the icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 162 (d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 162 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 162 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 162 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 162 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 162 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P9.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 162 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T3 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon. Displayed as TH. In addition, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 162 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 162 (i)).

At the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (hold icon change effect and icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 162 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) are continued according to the advance notice scenario. You may execute it.

(Specific example 12 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 12 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 163. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 148. This is an example.

It should be noted that the specific example 12 of FIG. 163 is different from the specific example 11 of FIG. 162 in that the pre-reading effect (movement effect and issuance effect) by the first movable member 73 is executed as the pre-reading advance notice effect, and is therefore common here. The description of the parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the specific example 12, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 163 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the jackpot is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 12, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined operation and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon is executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 163 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 163 (d)). The look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined operation effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 163 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 163 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 163 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, except that the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”, FIG. 163 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 163 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 163 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "2", the hold icon T1 is set to the first. It is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without shifting display in the hold icon display area 70B.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 163 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 163 (i)).

At the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on (the target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed according to the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed, the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light is emitted in a modest manner than the extinguishing or look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the effect is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for the jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 163 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (the target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

According to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from “3” to “1” at the timing of P10. As described above, when the number of first hold changes from "4" to "2" and when the number of first hold changes from "2" to "0", that is, the hold that the main control unit 110m knows. If the discrepancy between the number and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

In Specific Examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P10. As described above, in the specific examples 10 to 12, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (for example, three) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number during the display of the first hold information), the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 160 to 163, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E, the specific number is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any need. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 13 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 13 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 164. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 start the variation display of the first lamp symbol, but in the effect symbol 70a, a part of the decorative portion operates as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing a whole or part expansion / contraction operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 165 (a)).

In the specific example 13, based on the first hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 165 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) in which the zone BGM is output is displayed. ) Is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 165 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 165 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 165 (c)), and the first lamp is used. This stop when the symbol is lost (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 165 (d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 165 (f)).

The look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at the timings of P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image is continuously scrolled, and the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 165 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 165 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 165 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 165 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 165 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not pass through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 165 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 165 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 165 (h)). As described above, in the specific example 13, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 165 (i)).

It should be noted that, at the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

(Specific example 14 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 14 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 166. FIG. 164 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 164. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 13 of FIG. 165 and the specific example 14 of FIG. 166 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the specific example 13, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 165 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the jackpot is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 14, as the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon is being executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 166 (d)).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol are started to be variablely displayed, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. Further, the icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed (see FIG. 166 (d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 166 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 166 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 166 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 166 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 166 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "1". , The state of FIG. 166 (g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 166 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P11.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not pass through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 166 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 166 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 166 (i)).

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (hold icon change effect and icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 166 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) are continued according to the advance notice scenario. You may execute it.

(Specific example 15 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 15 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 167. FIG. 164 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 148. This is an example.

It should be noted that the specific example 15 of FIG. 167 is different from the specific example 14 of FIG. 166 in that the pre-reading effect (movement effect and issuance effect) by the first movable member 73 is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, and is therefore common here. The description of the parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 15, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 14.

In the specific example 15, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 167 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the jackpot is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 15, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined operation and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon is executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The symbol display 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 167 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 167 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a sound effect is output. It should be noted that the look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be continuously executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a in a plurality of variable effects of the effect symbol 70a for a part period of each variable effect. is there.

Further, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined operation effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 167 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 167 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a swings slightly (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 167 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 167 (FIG. 167), except that the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is set to "2". The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains “3”, and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 167 (FIG. 167), except that the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is set to "1". The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

At the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is non-animated for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not pass through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 167 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 167 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 167 (i)).

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on (the target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed according to the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed, the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light is emitted in a modest manner than the extinguishing or look-ahead notice effect. As such, the effect is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for the jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 167 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (the target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

According to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P11. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of P12. As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "1", that is, the difference between the hold number grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the hold number grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is ". If it is "3", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

In Specific Examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P12. As described above, in the specific examples 13 to 15, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number during the display of the first hold information), the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E, the specific number is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any need. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 16 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 16 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169. FIG. 168 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 168. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. It becomes. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 start the variation display of the first lamp symbol, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 169 (a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 169 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 169 (c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is continued, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 169). (D)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect is produced. The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130 m is changed from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first reserved number U1 is performed.

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The second hold icon T1 (CD icon) of 70B is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 169 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 169 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 169 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect (the SP reach effect ends), the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right temporarily stops in the reach loss mode (“161”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 169 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in the loss mode (turned off). This stop (see FIG. 169 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. One hold icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 169 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH (the icon corresponding to the first hold memory in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon TH is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 169 (FIG. 169). j) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of P2 to P4, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the effect control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m changes from "1" to "1" at the timing of P5 has been described, but the first hold number U1 is "0". From "0", when the first hold number U1 changes from "2" to "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control unit 110m stores. If the number of holdings (grasping) and the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

As described above, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 168 to 169, the number of hold icons is predetermined while the hold icon display area 70C is displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of hold icons (first hold information). When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is a number, the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. Is designed to display a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 168 to 169, the number of holds while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of holds in the sub first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of holds is displayed without displaying the number of holds one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 168 to 169, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area 70C, but the hold number is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of hold icons (for example, one) that is one more than "0" is displayed, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 168 to 169, the number of holds is set to "0" while the number of holds of "0" is displayed in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of holds of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of holds one more than "0" (for example, one). ). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 17 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 17 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 171 (a) to 171 (f) are effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of FIG. 170. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The two hold icons T1 displayed on the 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 171 (a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 171 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 171 (b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 171 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 171 (c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variation effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 171). (D)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect is produced. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second to fourth positions of 70B without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) ( (See FIG. 171 (e)).

Then, the required four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is set as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 171 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 171 (f)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of P2 to P6, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m (winning command, stop command). , Start command) will be processed in the same way as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command).

Here, the case where the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m changes from "1" to "3" at the timing of P7 has been described, but the first hold number U1 is "1". From "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control unit 110m stores. If the number of holdings (grasping) is larger than the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

As described above, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 170 to 171, the number of hold icons is a predetermined number while the hold icon (first hold information) of a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that becomes a specific number (for example, two), the number of hold icons that is one more than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed, and then the hold icon is displayed. By shifting the hold icons, a specific number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 170 to 171 while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of holds in the sub first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E, the number of holds is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variation display in which is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the predetermined number, the number of holdings that is one more than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without any notice. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 170 to 171, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of holds is a predetermined number (for example, while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that becomes (1), the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then those hold icons are shifted and displayed. By doing so, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 170 to 171 while displaying the number of holds of "0" in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E, the number of holds is a predetermined number (? For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is one), the predetermined number of holdings is displayed without displaying the number of holdings one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

According to the specific example described above, if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the fluctuation period of the lamp symbol. , The output period of BGM during fluctuation is extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no production is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the scrolling of the background image, the hold icon, and the rotation operation of the icon continue while the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a is extended (continued). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring production with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific example described above, even when the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol During the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the look-ahead notice effect does not change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied without causing an abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead notice effect.

Further, according to the specific example described above, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect deviates from the predetermined stop position. The variable display is started after all the effect symbols 70a including the symbol 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was planned to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed). .. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable effect can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved as compared with the case where the variable display is started with the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position.

Further, according to the specific example described above, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol are not stopped and displayed. The variable display is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol. Further, even if the effect symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), it is possible to inform the player that the variable effect is being performed by the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It is possible to improve.

Further, according to the specific example described above, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon receives the stop command for a normal time (receives the stop command). It is erased in a shorter time (one frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the newly executed variable effect to be hindered by erasing the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the effect control unit 130 m normally executes the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When it is received in, the look-ahead notice effect can be executed even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the effect control unit 130 m normally executes the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When it is received in, in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect of the content according to the scenario of the look-ahead notice effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the progress of the look-ahead advance notice effect will not be abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player will be dissatisfied will be avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 18 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 18 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 are effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 172. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The two hold icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the shift display of the hold icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing the rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead specification command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first hold number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is It remains "1", and the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first hold number "2" in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 173 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon T1 is not displayed in the second area corresponding to "2" of the first hold number U1 for which the winning command could not be received, and the hold icon T1 is not displayed and corresponds to "3" of the first hold number U1. The second hold icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 173 (b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 173 (c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in the loss mode (for example, extinguished). This stop at (see FIG. 173 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "3" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The second hold icon T1 corresponding to the first hold number "2" in the area 70B for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) and displayed. The three hold icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 173 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 173 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“225”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 173 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode. When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in the loss mode (for example, extinguished). This stop at (see FIG. 173 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit 130 m. The process for starting the variation effect is performed when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The two hold icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the earliest one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 173 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH (the icon corresponding to the first hold memory in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon Th is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 173 (FIG. 173). j) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130 m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is deleted at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is the same as the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive. Will be processed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m is "1" and the first hold number is "3", the winning command is received. As described above, when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m is "1" and the winning command for which the first hold number U1 is "4" is received, the effect control unit When the first hold number U1 stored (understood) by 130 m is "0" and the first hold number U1 is "2", "3", or "4" when a winning command is received. However, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. ) Is not displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number in the hold icon display area. The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, the second), but the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. ), When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of holds is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. ) Is not displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of holdings is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, the holding icon display area is set to the predetermined number. The area corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas (for example, for example) without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number (for example, the third) from the corresponding area (for example, the second). The hold icon is displayed in the 4th). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holds, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, the number (for example, one) is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. ) Is displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of holds is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, the number of holds is one less than the specified number. A specific number of holds is displayed without displaying the number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, a predetermined number of hold icons are not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 3) which is one more than the number of holds. A predetermined number of hold icons are additionally displayed in the area corresponding to a predetermined number of icon display areas (for example, the second) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed to hold a predetermined number. The icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas and a number one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number of holds is specified while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the fourth) corresponding to a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to (for example, three). When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area (for example, the second) and the number one more than the predetermined number (for example, the second). For example, by additionally displaying hold icons in the area corresponding to 3) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then shifting the hold icons, a number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 172 to 173, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130 m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as the hold icon. Does not execute the icon change effect, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning is not normally received, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In the specific example described above, when a predetermined number (4 or 3) of hold storages are stored in the main control board 110 and an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130, the first special On the symbol hold indicator 63 (first display), the number of holds is continuously reduced and displayed even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of an abnormality, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a specific number (two or more less than the main control board 110) of hold storage, which is less than a predetermined number (4 or 3)). When the command is normally received in the first image display device 70 (second display), the hold display gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number (for example, the number of hold icons is 4 to 2 or 1). 3 to 1) is not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, the hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, and is produced during the execution of the look-ahead effect by the hold display. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the control board 130, the look-ahead effect by the hold display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the look-ahead zone background) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the background display, the look-ahead effect by the background display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received. ..
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance by displaying characters (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), and execute the look-ahead effect by displaying characters. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the look-ahead effect by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, and the expectation level display is used. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect by displaying the expectation level can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, same-color chance eyes of the effect pattern, etc.), and abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect. When an abnormality occurs due to, the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation is possible in advance, and an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the pre-reading effect, and the effect control If there is a big hit in the hold memory that the board 130 has missed, the look-ahead effect by the hold display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, and even if the predetermined big prize opening is opened. Good.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, same-color chance eyes of the effect pattern, etc.), and abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect. When the command is normally received after the abnormality occurs due to
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a preliminary notification to increase the jackpot expectation, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the production pattern). After an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a continuous look-ahead effect that spans a plurality of symbol fluctuations based on the first hold memory, the command is stored after the first hold memory. When the command corresponding to the second hold storage is normally received, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be continuously executed based on the predetermined hold storage is not continuously performed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when a predetermined number (4 or 3) of hold storages are stored in the main control board 110 and an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol hold indicator 63, the number of holds (first display) is continuously reduced and displayed even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a specific number (two or more less than the main control board 110) of hold storage, which is less than the predetermined number (4 or 3)). When the command is normally received in, the hold display (second display, for example, four hold icons) is gradually reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in the hold number display areas 70B and 70D of the first image display device 70. 2 or 1 from 3 to 1) is not displayed. On the other hand, in the hold number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the hold display (third display, for example, the hold number) that gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number is not displayed. It is designed to change to a specific number of hold displays.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (oscillating state). Even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop state (swing state) of the effect symbol 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold memory, the second hold memory stored after the first hold memory is stored. When the command corresponding to is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory is not continuously performed. Or, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during execution of the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the second hold memory stored after the first hold memory is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first hold memory. Do not continue the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously, change the look-ahead effect to a display with a low degree of expectation, or delete the look-ahead effect. It has become.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE"). When a command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a is continuously executed for the first reserved storage. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the scheduled character display is not continuously performed, the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130. When a command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received after the occurrence, the normally received variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continuously displayed with respect to the first reserved storage. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display that was scheduled to be executed is not continuously performed, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted. ..
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. As a preliminary notification to raise the jackpot expectation in advance, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach (for example, a board accessory such as the first movable member 70) There are frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the production pattern). Then, based on the first hold memory, the effect control board 130 receives or does not receive the command abnormally during the execution of the look-ahead effect executed in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects in the period before the reach. When a command corresponding to the second hold memory stored after the first hold memory is normally received after the abnormality occurs due to, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the first hold memory is displayed. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not continuously performed, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the effect control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command and the command (hold memory) missed by the effect control board 130 has a big hit, it is stored after the big hit hold memory or the big hit hold memory. When the command corresponding to the hold storage is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory. May not be continuously performed, the look-ahead effect may be changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect may be deleted.
In this case, the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m can be smoothly linked. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold memory, the command is stored before the first hold memory or the first hold memory. When the command corresponding to the second hold storage is normally received, the look-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. Can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold memory, the command is stored before the first hold memory or the first hold memory. When the command corresponding to the second hold memory is normally received, the look-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. Is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during execution of the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for the hold memory of 1, can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during execution of the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for the hold memory of 1, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE"). , When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the first hold memory is displayed. It is now possible to continuously execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying characters, which was scheduled to be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE"). , When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the first hold memory is displayed. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying characters, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received after the occurrence, the first hold memory is displayed in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. It is now possible to continuously execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the expectation level, which was planned to be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold memory, an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). When a command corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory stored before the first hold memory is normally received after the occurrence, the first hold memory is displayed in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board for the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is held until the command is normally received. While the display) can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display and the operation effect of the first movable member 70) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. There is.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board for the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is held until the command is normally received. While the display) can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display and the operation effect of the first movable member 70) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. There is.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board for the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-reading effects, the first image display device 70 of the plurality of pre-reading effects is used until the command is normally received. While the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold display) to be executed can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, a second look-ahead effect) executed by using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects. For example, the operation effect of the first movable member 70) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board for the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the effect pattern. When a command is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold display) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is displayed. ) Can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. ..
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board for the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the effect pattern. When a command is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-reading effects, the first image display device 70 is used among the plurality of pre-reading effects. While the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold display) to be performed can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, for example) executed by using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects. , The operation effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, if an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which is not started and has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold memory is continued, and the identification unit (number) constituting the effect symbol 70a and the effect (EF) associated with the character are continued. ) Is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, if an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which is not started and has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold memory is continued, and a part of the decoration (for example, a bar-shaped image) attached to the character constituting the effect symbol 70a is continued. The operation effect of SG) is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, if an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which is not started and has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T corresponding to the hold storage is continued, and the operation effect of the hold icon T is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

When the number of holds stored in the main control board 110 is 2 or more less than the number of holds stored in the effect control board 130, it is displayed on the liquid crystal (first image display device, second image display device). The effect of gradually reducing the number of hold icons being held is rewritten to the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold commands input from the main control board 110 main without performing the effect of gradually reducing the number of hold icons that are separated.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110 m and the effect control unit 130 m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

As advance notification (look-ahead effect) that raises the jackpot expectation, for example, hold change, hold change character display, hold change character display change, and character display (telop) that suggests a shift to a mode consisting of multiple types. , Background color change, background change, return of appearing characters, appearance of new characters, expectation display by multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), predetermined production to be performed in the first period (before reach) from the start of fluctuation (Button vibration, frame / board accessory movement, effect, lightning, character display, specific sound, predetermined lamp emission) may be performed in parallel with a plurality of variable effects.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands via a state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the effect symbol 70a is statically displayed (main stop) and the command is responded to. The display process may be executed.

Even if the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the stop command, the background image associated with each of the plurality of effect modes may be displayed. At this time, in a plurality of effect modes, hold, pseudo, group notice, and the like are displayed in a common display mode (form and color), but the degree of expectation may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a light guide plate display, a title display, and the like are displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the effect mode.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state of the stop command during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, the previous look-ahead effect may not be continuously executed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state of the stop command during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the following command is normally received, a new effect (for example, including the icon change in the relevant case) may be executed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state of the stop command during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change the display mode (for example, the hold display is changed from the blue icon to the plain display) with a lower expectation than the previous look-ahead effect.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormal reception or non-reception state during the look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage), the abnormal reception or non-reception In the state, the look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state of the stop command during the look-ahead effect of displaying the character display (for example, telop), the abnormally received or unreceived command is received. In the state of, the look-ahead effect of displaying the character display (telop) may be continuously displayed.

Displaying the expected value display (color change, effect, hold) If the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via a state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received during the look-ahead effect, an error occurs. In the received or unreceived state, the look-ahead effect of displaying the expected value display (color change, effect, hold) may be continuously executed.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the variation effect is not limited to displaying a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has ended in the temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), and the variation effect has ended. A part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in the temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), and the rest of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in the main stopped state (stationary state). For example, when a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, while the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped or the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped. Therefore, it can be changed as appropriate, such as stopping the central effect symbol 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a may be expanded or contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the effect symbol 70a is displaced in the direction of contraction (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expansion (more than the normal size). If it is large), it is better to make it a normal size and display it at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a does not swing and the decorative part and the number part protrude from the base image. It may be made to fluctuate like this. In this case, if a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction that protrudes from the base image, it will fit in the base image and be displayed at the stop position. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the number part (identification character) in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the decoration portion fluctuates when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the operation (effect operation) is not performed, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part composed of a symbol effect image, and the symbol effect image is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation operation (directing operation) may be performed.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, an effect may be executed such that the identification unit (number) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect is completed operates. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed. The motion effect may not be executed in the remaining part of the effect symbol 70a.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the effect (for example, the symbol effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character) associated with the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect is completed ) Should be performed. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed. The motion effect may not be executed in the remaining part of the effect symbol 70a.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the decoration (for example, and the bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect is completed ) Should be performed. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect has been completed. The motion effect may not be executed in the remaining part of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion fluctuate (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the rod-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE Only one of the above may be made to perform a fluctuating operation (directing operation).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that the hold display (for example, the hold icon) operates.

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that the hold display (for example, the hold icon) operates.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to continue the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ.

When the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is started based on a normal command after the command of the effect control board 130 is omitted, even if the numerical information of the effect symbol 70a and the numerical information of the special symbol TZ are different Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are not mentioned, but the frame lighting device during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission mode in which there is less change or movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the panel lighting device 76 has the same light emitting mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, and light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation. It may be set to (aspect, extinguishing). In this case, when the start command is received next time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 change (switch) to the light emitting mode according to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a in the loss mode is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), but the number is the same as that of the effect symbol 70a. The main stop may be made in such a lost manner. Further, when the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot mode is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode (“333”), but the book is in the jackpot mode which is the same number as the effect symbol 70a. You may want to stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start command start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. When the effect control unit 130m receives the designated command), the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol continues, but as with the effect symbol 70a, the variation display is displayed after being instantaneously derived and displayed. You may want to start. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position may be displayed at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state specification command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased without animation for one frame, but when stopped. It may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TH based on the reception of a command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon T, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, it is erased by animation for 5 frames. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command is received while displaying a number of hold icons larger than the number of holds, the surplus hold icons T1 are deleted by one frame of non-animation. The number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon T1 based on the reception of the stop command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased by the animation of the minute.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start command in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the hold number and the effect control unit 130 m notified from the main control unit 110 m are stored (grasped). If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (anomaly with the same number, anomaly with a deviation in the increasing direction) from the number of pending icons, the number of pending icons that is one more than the specified number is displayed. Although a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed after the display, a predetermined number of hold icons may be displayed as they are without displaying a number of hold icons one more than the predetermined number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start command in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the hold number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasped). If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (anomaly with the same number, anomalies with a deviation in the increasing direction) from the number of pending commands, the command is executed in response to the reception of this start command. Although the icon is displayed during the variation effect, the icon may not be displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the reception of the start command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a CD icon regardless of the type of the production mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the type of the production mode and the game state. Good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of effect mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the type of effect mode and game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the normal icon. May be good. Further, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the special icon. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but the special icon or the specific icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) suggesting the change to the special icon is specified. A specific icon suggesting that the reach effect of (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon or the specific icon or the mode of the effect operation may be different from the form of the normal icon or the special icon or the mode of the effect operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the look-ahead specification command of the hold number specification command as the winning command is normally received, but the hold number specification command is received and the look-ahead designation is specified. The hold icon may be displayed when the command is not received normally, while the hold icon may not be displayed when the look-ahead specification command is normally received without normally receiving the hold number specification command. And vice versa. When the hold icon is displayed by receiving only one of the hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command, the icon change effect for the hold icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by the operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command. During the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a based on the command abnormality, the operation for changing the effect mode is not accepted, that is, the effect button 17 It is advisable to regulate the change of the effect mode based on the operation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is displayed. Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon for which is enabled is displayed, an operation change effect that changes the button icon to one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. .. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined ratio. You may do so. In this case, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue notice effect or decision effect. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing the operation effect (speech notice effect, decision effect) is only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as an effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example. An operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever is executed during the valid period generated during the SP reach effect, and an operation effect (decision effect, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever. You may. In this case, the determined effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state) is better than the case where the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the normal game state is executed. The operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed (difficult to be executed) at a low rate.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the reach effect, the operation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game is executed in response to the operation of the effective effect button 17 is not executed. The operation notice effect may be executed in the first half period (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP reach effect) of the reach effect. In this case, the effect button 17 moves to the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the effect position) in the operation notice effect executed in the latter half of the reach effect than in the operation notice effect executed in the first half of the reach effect. ) Should be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member are not linked, but the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable effect, the movable member operates more when the advance notice effect of the content having a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the advance notice effect of the content having a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is recommended that the ratio be high (easy to operate).

In the present embodiment, the hold icon T1 (T2) is displayed in the hold icon display area 70B (70C) and the hold number is displayed in the hold number display area 70E (70F) as the hold storage in the first image display device 70. There is. In this way, in the hold icon display area 70B (70C), the hold number is displayed by the display number of the hold icon T1 (T2), and in the hold number display area 70E (70F), the hold number is displayed by the numerical information of the hold number. it's shown. The hold icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, character, or symbol as in the "CD" shape of the present embodiment, but may be a combination of a plurality of pictures, figures, characters, symbols, or a picture. It is possible to adopt an appropriate configuration, such as adding effects (effect effects) or decorations to the main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of holds, such as the hold icon change effect, is not limited to the change of the hold icon alone, but even if the change effect is performed so that it changes due to the action of other characters or the action of the effect such as a character. Good. The change in the hold icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As an example of pre-reading effect (advance notification) by character display, an example in which the characters of "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction was given, but the character display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but symbols, pictures, figures, or these. It may be a combination with. Further, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may be different depending on the degree of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, and any mode that attracts the player's attention, such as zooming in or out, panning or tilting, can be adopted.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the degree of expectation, a color effect that exemplifies the blue effect image EF is mentioned, but it is not limited to the color effect, for example, a light emitting effect with a halo or black. Appropriate display can be adopted, such as action effects such as being sucked in like a hall or blowing wind. Further, the expectation degree display is not limited to being accompanied by the effect symbol 70a or being performed by the effect symbol 70a itself, and may be performed by a background display or the like. Further, the expectation degree display is not limited to the display on the first image display device 70, and the accessory or light emitting device provided on the game board, the winning device such as the light emitting device or the start port, or the accessory or light emitting device provided on the game frame. It may be performed by light emission such as.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display may be an effect executed only before the reach or an effect executed after the reach. Further, when the expectation degree display is executed after the reach, it may be continuously displayed in the mode before the reach, or may be changed so as to be displayed in a mode different from the mode before the reach.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) may proceed in a variable effect or at an appropriate timing according to the lottery scenario, but for each variable effect, the presence or absence of progress and the necessity of changing the degree of expectation are determined. A lottery may be held and the process may proceed according to the result.

As the effect effects typified by the effects, the pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character and the color effect exemplifying the blue effect image EF are mentioned, but the effect is not limited to the color effect, and for example, a halo is shining. It is possible to adopt an appropriate display such as a light emission effect such as, or an action effect such as being sucked in like a black hole or blowing a wind.

In the present embodiment, a specific example in which the icon TH is not displayed when the command is normally received and returned from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m has been described. When it is received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the effect control unit 130m described above, when the first special symbol hold indicator 63 cannot normally receive a command (signal) from the main control unit 110m, the hold displayed by the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is displayed. A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of holdings grasped (stored) by the effect control unit 130m deviate from each other.
That is, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 (first display means) can execute the first shift display in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started, and the effect control unit 130 m can execute the first shift display. When a specified number (for example, 2) of hold storage commands (signals), which is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 2), is received from the main control unit 110m in a state where there is a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage, the first It is possible to execute the second shift display in which the reserved memory is reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in a reduction mode different from the one shift display (a mode in which the number is directly reduced from four to two without passing through three). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the effect control unit 130 m has an effect symbol regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variation effect of 70a is completed, the reserved memory can be reduced and displayed one by one.
According to this, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In a specific example, the hold memory stored (grasped) by the effect control unit can be displayed at a plurality of places. In the present embodiment, the hold storage is displayed in two places, the hold icon display area 70B (70D) and the hold number display area 70E (70F) of the first image display device 70. For example, the first image display device The hold storage may be displayed at each of the 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations of the second image display device 71.

In a specific example, in the hold icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to execute the first shift display in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. In this first shift display, for example, the hold icons T1 (T2) are displayed so as to be shifted next to each other for each variation effect. Further, when, for example, four hold icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 70B (70D), and the effect control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two hold storages, the hold icon is held. The hold icon T1 (T2) does not display the same as the first shift display, in which the icon T1 (T2) shifts from 4 to 3 and decreases to 3, and then shifts from 3 to decrease to 2. After the 4th item disappears, the 2nd shift display is performed so that the number of items shifts from 3 to 2 and decreases. On the other hand, in the hold number display area 70E (70F) for displaying the hold memory by the hold number (numerical information), the hold number is displayed so as to be sequentially decreased by one each time the variation effect is started. There is. When, for example, the hold number "4" is displayed in the hold number display area 70E (70F), for example, when the effect control unit 130 m receives a command corresponding to two hold storages (the second shift display is executed). ), Instead of displaying the reserved numbers in order, the third shift display is performed to display the reserved numbers "2" corresponding to, for example, two reserved numbers from the reserved number "4". It has become.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification), it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation for a special game based on undetermined hold memory by executing related effects in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects. It is feasible to do. As the "related effect", a predetermined color emission such as an action by an accessory provided on the game frame or the game board or an effect by light emission, an operation or light emission such as vibration of an operation button, or a same color chance eye of the effect symbol 70a is performed. Various effects can be mentioned, such as an effect to be performed, for example, a sound effect that sounds a predetermined sound effect such as "Pickin" at the time of winning a prize. Even if the same effect is executed in each variable effect, the content of the effect may be different for each variable effect, for example, different effects that increase the degree of expectation are executed as the variable effect is repeated. Further, the effect may be a related effect by executing the same effect a plurality of times, but the same or different ones may be combined to perform a related effect, or a plurality of types of effects may be performed alternately or in a predetermined order. It may be combined to perform related effects.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease even though the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control unit 110 m, the effect related to the look-ahead effect (advance notification) is continued. It may or may not be executed. In such a case, the player's interest can be attracted by continuously executing the related effect. In addition, the consistency of the production can be maintained by not continuously executing the related production.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold memory stored after the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related effect. In addition, a related effect of the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory (for example, performing a large motion effect of the first movable member 73) is another related effect (for example, the first movable) having a lower expectation than the related effect. The operation effect of the member 73 may be reduced). Further, the related effect of the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold memory stored before the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be executed from the continuation of the related effect. In this case, the player's expectation can be improved by continuing the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold memory stored before the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related effect. In this case, the consistency of the production can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109, a drive source for converting a large winning opening or a starting opening from a closed state to an open state is operated by controlling a main control board. ing. However, in the conventional game machine, when the game board is replaced in the game store or the game board constituting the front side of the game board is replaced, the drive source operated by the control of the main control board is activated. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to confirm the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 has a drive source (large winning opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) for which the main control board 110 controls the operation as a result of the game, and is mainly controlled. The substrate 110 is adapted to initially operate the drive source in a predetermined mode in a pre-start state before shifting to a game-enabled state in which game control is performed after the power supply is started.
As a result, the special electric accessory, the ordinary electric accessory, and the distribution mechanism in the winning opening are operated for a certain period limited to the state before the start of the game (the state before the start), and the operation is confirmed to confirm the installation. In addition, inspection and confirmation after parts replacement can be performed more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the setting change device is mounted, a certain period after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed is set as the pre-start state. In this case, there is preparation for clearing RWM.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is the pre-start state. .. In this case, there is no preparation for clearing RWM.

As shown in FIG. 176, when the setting change device is not installed, a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is set as the pre-start state. In this case, after shifting to the pre-start state, for example, 7 seconds later, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times. It is good to shift to the playable state after going.

As shown in FIG. 177, when the setting changing device is mounted, the setting changing or setting checking is set as the pre-start state.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the setting change device is not installed, the state before the start is set from the time when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again. In this case, the ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) / OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) of each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game when the state shifts to the pre-start state is set to the game-enabled state by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. Repeat until you make the transition. In this case, preparations for clearing RWM are in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, the prize ball is paid out by winning a prize at the winning opening of the game ball, the special symbol display device is operated or the special electric accessory is operated by winning the prize at the starting port of the game ball, and the game ball is normal. The operation of the ordinary symbol display device or the operation of the ordinary electric accessory by passing through the gate or winning a prize in the winning opening related to the operation of the symbol display device is invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so that the launch of the game ball is not invalid. Further, in the state before the start, it is preferable to turn off (hide) the performance display monitor.

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, during the opening of the large winning opening in the state before the start, the opening signal from the game information output terminal board is not output. It is advisable to send a power-on / power-recovery command when shifting to the playable state, and to perform the initial operation of the gimmick (role) after shifting to the game-enabled state. Then, during the operation of the large winning opening solenoid in the state before the start, it is preferable not to emit the large winning opening LED or the like as in the case of a big hit.

The performance display monitor may be fully lit for, for example, 5 seconds after the inspection mode is completed, and then the base value may be displayed. In addition, it is advisable to stop firing in a state of "other than power recovery" (state before start, during unrecoverable error).

The game machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means that controls the production of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with (effect control unit 130 m), the main control means (main control unit 110 m) stores a hold memory based on the establishment of a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45 and 47). It is possible, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and whether to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to execute the determination of whether or not, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) controls so that the hold memory is displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In addition to being possible, the second display means can execute the variation effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform the variation effect. It is possible to execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is reduced one by one each time the operation is started, and the hold memory of a predetermined number (for example, 4) is displayed. When the slave control means receives a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals less than a predetermined number by 2 or more from the main control means, the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) is displayed. Is capable of executing a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) for reducing the hold memory from the predetermined number to the specific number in different reduction modes, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64). ) Is held each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. The feature is that the memories can be reduced and displayed one by one in order.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second image display device 71) can be controlled so as to display the image. The 1-image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the signal of the hold storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is stored in the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) To the specific number (for example, 2), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed by the hold storage (for example, icon change effect) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special). In the symbol hold display 63,64), the second display means (first) is displayed during a period in which the hold memory is displayed so as to decrease by one from the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two). Even if the hold storage displayed on the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) does not decrease to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification is given. Can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold display) The device 63,64) ends the determination regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second image display device 71) can be controlled so as to display the image. The 1-image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the signal of the hold storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is stored in the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) To the specific number (for example, 2), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed by the background display (for example, change to the look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display In the means (special symbol hold display 63,64), the second display means is displayed so that the hold memory is reduced by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). Even if the hold storage displayed on the (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces), the front Pre-article notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol) The hold indicator 63,64) determines whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time the operation is completed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second image display device 71) can be controlled so as to display the image. The 1-image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the signal of the hold storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is stored in the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) To the specific number (for example, 2), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed by the character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the suggestion advance notification can be executed by the first display means (for example, the "ZONE" telop). In the special symbol hold display 63,64), the second display means (second display means (for example) Even if the hold storage displayed on the 1 image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 2), the advance Notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold) The indicators 63,64) make the determination regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time it is finished.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and is based on undetermined hold storage. The advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high can be executed by the expectation display (for example, pre-reading effect effect), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display). The device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the hold memory one by one each time the variation effect is started, and holds a predetermined number (for example, 4). In the state where the memory is displayed, the main control means displays a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). When received from (main control unit 110m), the reserved storage is stored from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 pieces). It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2), which is reduced to, and the first display means (special symbol holding display 63,64) changes the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 4). For example, the predetermined number of hold memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed so that the hold memories are reduced by one to (for example, two). Even in a predetermined state in which the number does not decrease from (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64) is the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the said. Regardless of which of the second shift displays (for example, 4 to 2) is executed, the hold memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time the determination is completed.

◇ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and each of the plurality of variation effects can be controlled. By executing a related effect (for example, the motion effect of the first movable member 73) during a part of the variable effect, it is suggested that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The notification can be executed, and the first shift means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) sequentially reduces the reserved storage one by one each time the variation effect is started. Display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed, the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is predetermined (for example, 4). ), When a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals less than 2) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), what is the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3)? It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for reducing the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in different reduction modes, and the first display means. (Special symbol hold display 63,64) may be executed regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. Each time the determination is completed, the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is used in the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64). The second display means (first image display device 70, A predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease.
When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notification, the effect related to the advance notification (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73, etc.) ) Is not executed from the continuation.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), which is an advantageous special game (big hit) based on the hold memory. It is possible to execute the determination as to whether or not to perform the operation, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute the variation effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 71) can be controlled. The 1-image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the signal of the hold storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2 pieces) that reduces the number to (pieces), the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, the numerical information It is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the reserved storage of the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) without performing the display for sequentially reducing the numbers one by one. When either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed by the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64). Even so, it is characterized in that the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second image display device 71) can be controlled so as to display the image. The 1 image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect) when there is no hold memory after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect. It is possible to execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced one by one each time the variation effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold memories is displayed. In the state, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) transmits a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four). When received from, a second shift that reduces the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). Display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64) holds the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). During the period in which the memories are displayed so as to decrease one by one, the number of reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is from the predetermined number (for example, four). When the predetermined number does not decrease to the specific number (for example, 2), the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the predetermined number even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect. The first display means without executing the production (for example, the customer waiting demo production). (Special symbol hold display 63,64) may be executed regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. Each time the determination is completed, the reserved memory can be reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Etc.) can be executed, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) displays the memory even though the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed, based on the target hold memory. One of changing the advance notification to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, and erasing the advance notification based on the target hold storage. It is characterized by.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). ) The display means (first image display device 70) provides advance notification suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. , It can be executed by the background display (for example, the look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second image display device 71), and the display means (for example, the main control unit (main control unit 110 m) increases or decreases the reserved storage, but the display means (for example). When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the above-mentioned thing. When the pre-notification can be continuously executed and the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage that is the target of the pre-notification, the pre-notification is based on the target hold storage. The pre-article notification is not continuously executed, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the pre-notification based on the target hold storage is performed. It is characterized in that one of the following is performed to delete the pre-article notification.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the display means (first image display device 70) provides advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. , The display means can be executed by the character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second image display device 71), and the display means is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed, the target hold memory. The advance notification based on the above is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted. It is characterized by performing.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed, and the advance based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. The feature is that the notification is changed to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, or the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted. To do.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variation effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is undetermined by executing the related effect (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) in a part period of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects. It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the hold memory of the above, and the display is displayed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while being able to be displayed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage that is the target of the advance notification and the advance notification can be continuously executed, the target hold storage is used as the basis. The related effect of the advance notification based on the target hold memory (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73), which is not executed from the continuation of the effect related to the advance notification (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73). To another related effect with a lower expectation than the related effect, and to erase the related effect of the advance notification based on the target hold memory. It is characterized by doing.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. ) Is executable, and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification. When returning from the predetermined state based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed, and the above-mentioned thing based on the target hold memory. The advance notification is changed to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, or the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted, and the display is performed. The means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. It is possible, and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is larger than the predetermined number (for example, 4). When a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals that are two or more less than each other is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the reduction mode is different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). Hold memory with the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example) The second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number from (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed, and the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the numerical information. When the shift display is executed, the third shift display (for example,) which displays the numerical information corresponding to the reserved storage of the specific number (for example, 2) without performing the display for sequentially decreasing the numerical information one by one. It is characterized in that 4 to 2) can be executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and when there is no hold memory after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable effect, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect), and the main control means (main) When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease even though the hold memory increases or decreases in the control unit 110 m). While the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state. At the same time, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, and the hold memory stored after the target hold memory targeted for the advance notification is stored. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the above, the advance notification based on the target hold storage, which does not continuously execute the advance notification based on the target hold storage, is expected to be higher than the advance notification. It is characterized in that one of changing to another advance notification having a lower value and erasing the advance notification based on the target hold storage is performed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target hold that is the target of the advance notification is held. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target hold that is the target of the advance notification is held. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the background display (for example,) for displaying the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the displayed hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory that is the target of the above, the advance notification based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the background display (for example,) for displaying the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the displayed hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory that is the target of the target, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and a character display (for example,) for displaying a prior notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is performed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and a character display (for example,) for displaying a prior notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is performed even though the hold memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The first advance notification (for example, the hold icon change effect) suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and Expectations for the special game based on undetermined hold memory by executing related effects (for example, motion effects of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects. It is possible to execute a second advance notification suggesting that the value is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the second advance notification is continued. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target hold memory is related. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73).

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The first advance notification (for example, the hold icon change effect) suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and Expectations for the special game based on undetermined hold memory by executing related effects (for example, motion effects of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects. It is possible to execute a second advance notification suggesting that the value is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the second advance notification is continued. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target hold memory is related. It is characterized in that it is not executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73).

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, from four) that sequentially reduces the reserved storage one by one each time the variation effect is started. 3) can be executed, and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4). When a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals, which is two or more less than (4), is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is performed in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the number of images from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and the number of reserved storage can be displayed by numerical information. Yes, the second shift display is executed If so, the third shift display (4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of the reserved storage is executed without displaying the numerical information to be sequentially reduced one by one. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) based on the target hold storage is continuously executed. Instead, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the reserved storage one by one each time the variation effect is started. In a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4). When a specific number (for example, two) of hold storage signals, which is two or more less than the number of the first control means, is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is performed in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for reducing the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and it is possible to display the number of reserved storages by numerical information. , The place where the second shift display is executed In that case, it is possible to execute a third shift display (4 to 2) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the reserved storage of the specific number (for example, 2) without displaying the numerical information to be sequentially reduced one by one. It is characterized by being.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is possible to execute the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and the variable effect is started. When there is no hold memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). Regardless of this, when a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect, and the target targeted for the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is possible to execute the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and the variable effect is started. When there is no hold memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect), and the main control means (main control unit 110 m) increases or decreases the hold memory. Regardless of this, when a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, and the target targeted for the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display in the temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display of the hold storage is continued and the effect symbol (the effect symbol (1st image display device 70, 2nd image display device 71) is displayed. In a state where the effect effect (for example, symbol effect image ZE) can be executed in the effect symbol (70a) while the 70a) is displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storages are displayed. , The main control means (main control unit 110 m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals (commands) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four). ), The display effect of gradually reducing the number of reserved storage is not performed by the number of deviations (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2). It is characterized in that a predetermined number (for example, 2) of hold storages are displayed.

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display in the temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display of the hold storage is continued and the effect symbol (the effect symbol (1st image display device 70, 2nd image display device 71) is displayed. With the 70a) displayed in the temporarily stopped state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of at least a part (for example, the bar-shaped image SG) of the decorative portion of the effect symbol (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage can be stored. In the displayed state, the subordinate control means (effect control unit 130 m) controls a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals (commands) that is 2 or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). When received from the means (main control unit 110 m), the display effect of gradually reducing the number of reserved storages is the number of deviations (for example, 2) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2). It is characterized in that the hold storage of the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces) is displayed without performing (times).

◆ The game machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110 m) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110 m). In a game machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45,47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display in the temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed in the temporarily stopped state. In this state, the display of the hold memory can be continued, and the effect effect of the hold memory can be executed. In the state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m). ) Is 2 or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), when a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals (commands) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the number of hold storage The display effect of gradually reducing the number of images is not performed by the number of deviations (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4 pieces) and the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces), and the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces) is held and stored. Is characterized by displaying.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for rotating cylinder type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine 110m Main control unit (main control means)
130m production control unit (subordinate control means)
63 1st special symbol hold indicator (1st display means)
64 Second special symbol hold indicator (first display means)
70 First image display device (display means, second display means)
71 Second image display device (display means, second display means)
70a production pattern

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and a secondary control means for controlling the production of a game based on a signal from the main control means.
The main control means
The hold memory based on the establishment of the start condition can be stored, and the hold memory can be controlled to be displayed on the first display means.
It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the hold memory.
The slave control means
It is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the second display means, and it is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol by the second display means.
By executing related effects in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects, it is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Yes,
The second display means is
It is possible to execute the first shift display in which the reserved memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started.
When the slave control means receives a specific number of hold storage signals that are two or more less than the predetermined number from the main control means while displaying a predetermined number of hold storages, the first shift display is It is possible to execute a second shift display in which the reserved memory is reduced from the predetermined number to the specific number in different reduction modes.
The first display means is
Regardless of which of the first shift display and the second shift display is executed, the hold memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time the determination is completed.
The slave control means
A predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the second display means does not increase or decrease even though the reserved memory increases or decreases in the first display means.
A game characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related effect. Machine.

Images